Home

Genie User Manual Volume 3

1. This technique can be used to define the profile of holes and other cut outs The same can be achieved by using the option Fillet Curves In this case you type in the radius when you are in graphics mode before you hit the Enter button or carriage return The lines are highlighted in orange when selecting them In the example below the first line has been selecte
2. OO HHMHHHMHHHMHHHH HMHH HHHHHHHHHHHH DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 219 15 September 2011 To do dynamic analysis using the direct time integration method it is necessary to edit the analysis input file Remember to deselect the automatic generation of input file and manually create the input file The load history used in this example 15 a sinusoidal load 360 degrees over 2 4 sec The corresponding input for the one load case line loads and the mass matrix is shown below F sestra inp Notepad l File Edit Format wiew Help Created by GeniE D4 0 12 26 May 2008 Date O1 Jun 2008 Time 10 32 35 User nek Manually edited CHECK MOLO STIF LECK ds 40080602 112757 NORSAM 1 4 LOAD HISTORY 1 1 d s RTRAC PRMT STOR EQUI SELL SEL2 SEL3 Ba a 1 1 The results be seen in Xtract The pictures below show deformations at time steps 0 3 sec and 1 4 sec Contour Abov s ous Abov 0 0202036 Cont C Eg uo 202 00155803 00183669 00141457 0 0165302 00127311 Lo gt Led 4 00148935 00113166 0 0128568 Ld 000990199 0 0110201 000648742 000918345 a 000707265 0 00734676 p P 0 00565828 0 00551007 000424371 0 00357338 000282914 000183659 000141457 0 0 EB o D R 9 Below b y DET NORSKE VERITAS
3. UE 193 6 3 LOCAL MESU SETIING ES RE ated a 195 Od Clementis along a ihe e oo AE 195 totis 196 03 JMOSIEODILORS TOT TACE OF CO CC Ie Masse du MES 197 6 4 ERIS ZONES MT T cec 200 6 5 PRIORINZE D NES MIN dotted 204 6 6 MESEIEPARIS OESTRUC TURE ONL Ys odeur onte sodomie dite kat Ete nd eL UL dcs me Lit tie le sind 208 6 7 MESTEOC KIN cS APERTE 210 Te AINA SIS 212 ym PRE DEPINED ANALY SIS ACTIVITIES ed tn nr ane estelle ei dat e 212 7 2 ANALYSIS ACTIVITIES 2215 0 99 02 nd tire tte te cs eios paco MI oos lice teen 215 7 3 STATIC FIGENVALUE AND DYNAMIC ANALY SIS pei Ee pote 217 5 PROCESSING 220 AJMPORT AND EXPORT 2 ando 223 9 1 THE COMMAND FILE GENERATED BY OPNE toti ERU SL ar end ae TW 224 912 THE CONDENSED COMMAND FILE ona iode ies peta a taU odio E oe ERI 224 9 3 dul CONCEPT MODEL S TR 225 9 4 FEM i ee ai
4. TM 226 9 5 renner dinde 229 9 6 US S VT EIE ne an eo cud 232 9 7 PEG BT T 233 10 PICTURES AND REPOR DS sean eo eue ea e Uva Eu HY ois v oer oue eua ose dsscesevevebastsesscauaercodescessosceseues 234 11 APPENDIX A REFERENCES DNE PUE EE CRM P 236 12 APPENDIX B MATERIAL LIBRARY tis erE 237 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 4 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 5 15 September 2011 1 INTRODUCTION This is the user manual for the part of GeniE dedicated to modelling of plate and shell structures for offshore and maritime structures This user manual assumes that the user has knowledge in the use of GeniE as covered by the GeniE User Manual Volume I the main user manual This manual describes how to create plate and shell structures based on guiding geometry or existing information how to apply loads and boundary conditions how to create and control the finite element how to run analysis as well as how to look at results Chapter 2 gives an overview of concept modelling strategies while the rest of the Chapters focuses load applications boundary conditions how to create an
5. DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 81 15 September 2011 3 3 3 Make a 3D tubular joint When making rotation symmetric structure it is recommended to define these in segments of 45 90 or 180 degrees In this example a vertical column is made by the skin operation while the incoming braces are made using the sweep curve extrude functionality To trim the braces to the column and adjacent braces divide and delete is used The column is made from skinning between the high lighted curves The selected curves to the right are swept 10m in x direction to form the horizontal brace t Curves to sweep from selection Curves Curve5 Curve Curved Sweep curves along C Curve Vector 1 000 DK Cancel 1 This example assumes that the inclined braces have the same diameter as the horizontal brace hence the horizontal brace is copied using a rotate operation and move The upper brace is overlapping with the horizontal brace while there is a gap between the horizontal and lower brace The picture to the right shows the shell configuration before divide and delete The inclined braces have been selected and divided using Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates The high lighted parts show which shells that need to be deleted to trim the inclined braces to the column DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Use
6. t h Introduction Introduction Release Notes Function Function Summary Support Request double abs double x Refurns fhe absolufe value of x User s Guide EE iol 1 Concept engineeri double acos double x IV OL 1 t oncept engineering Returns the arc cosine of x Bva Waves pile and soil pem ouble asin double x vol 3 Plate Shell Structures hears Biol 4 Beam code checki double atan double x BReference Documents Returns the arc tangent of x double atan2 double y double x Command Reference Returns the arc tangent of fhe quotient v x of fhe arguments y and x JScript commands double ceil double x Returns the smallest closest to number value that is not less than x and is equal to a mathematical integer Tutorials double cos Quantity x Refurns fhe cosine of x Example Index dose cos UnitValue Wizards eos double 000 Wizard templates double cosh double x returns the hyperbolic cosine of x HowTo Videos double exp double Video Index Returns the exponential function of x DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 104 15 September 2011 4 2 4 Line loads on plate edges Line loads can be applied along a plate edge If you try to apply a line load in the middle of a plate where there is no edge the line load will not be included in the analysis In the illustration to the right li
7. data The previous option assumed a spring Position Point 27m0m4m Appl characteristic with no diagonal offset values By using the boundary stiffness option the offset values may o 1 2 3 4 5 58 Boundary Type be defined 2 D kim 100 D kim 0 D EH D KM Spring CARE 2 imm ho om OKN Spring 00 Boundary Condition Boundary Stiffness Matri S ffness Matrix Symmetry is enforced hence it is sufficient to specify the upper triangle of the matrix DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 163 15 September 2011 5 4 Create a super element When using boundary condition type super a finite element model with connection points or super nodes is created The finite element model can be used in a super element assembly generated by Presel Super nodes are automatically created where there are Mame sp0 boundary conditions of type Position Pointf27 m 0 m4 m super at a point or along a Point 27 m0 m 4 m curve Boundary Condition Boundary Stiffness Matrix Boundary conditions Remember to specify superelement type M Let change y and Spring EditlRules IMeshing prior to Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness making the mesh The finite a ae element model can now be ae eee exported from the command FilelExport FEM M change ry and rz Spring Fined Free Prescribed Dep
8. 52 3 3 1 4 tar tr os reer I iret eter renter PE Cer 57 3 3 1 5 TIES CTE USING COV CI GU VES OT 61 3 3 1 6 ISP USO GEG RPO MN ME IMEEM MEME IM tay unre 63 3 3 1 7 Inser ustno curvo met qierDOlQIOW E I SRG ANE RRA 65 3 3 1 8 Define plates USING beams as TE tob adest east a 69 3 3 1 9 DUIde us GNM CARY pet e pae eo 70 SIL AO cDiideandirim USING existing SUCHCIWEO uia case te der eta EE SQUARE SALONES PURO ROR CRE TNE 71 Dd i USING cune CUT VOS cioe ea DIO tae i ic mE dt nie 72 DA SUCH USI DUO CUPVES ea a HO Num eti e 72 Ow Funch andide USING dept Eee ade tee eee talea eh Re sei eoe cc a aie Dodo 79 DIM D Se DIU me rete M DIM ME MINIM EN 74 bus eM er Dee 75 392 Ue 2D structure to make 3D SETUCTUT eeu ue ET AT TOI suds S1 3 5 4 Make special 3D structures like cones spheres and bulbs esses eene eene nnne 82 3 9 Add sner nc 84 3 3 5 1 SUIS beams between snap POIS tete viti Hea ME 84 Dione Curved beams t DODV Oen GS nOD DOUMS ERS EEUU ERE een UO NIE
9. LE i a Saas X m Y m 7 Y Rot Support Point 0 2 Fixed Fixed Fixed Free Support Point 0 2 Fixed Fixed Fixed Free Support Point 28 2 Fixed Prescribed Fixed i Fixed Support Point 28 2 Fixed Prescribed Fixed i Fixed 141 EL 2015 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Adobe PDF Type a question for help 2 x E RT J 0 amp r 4 10 ava 10 8 5 o A 8 2 d ou A i i Reply with Changes End Review v f LoadName E DEC IDescription LoadType X m Y m Z m DX m DY m DZ m Prescribed Disp Explicit 28 22 2 0 0 25 Prescribed Disp Explicit 28 0 M 4 gt MLCSplitSupportDisplaceme SupportBoundaryCondition Ready 4 3 Surface loads Surface loads are applied to wet surfaces for plates and shells A wet surface is associated with the plate or shell this means that when such objects are moved the load will follow For plates it is also possible to specify the surface loads with a polygon footprint Applied loads are computed when there is an intersection between the footprint and the structure In this case the loads will not follow when the structural object is moved 4 3 1 Plate surface loads These are surface loads defined by using the polygon footprint option It is a flexible solution for plates as you can make the surface loads independent of the plates or wet surfaces This option can be us
10. 172 ODO COLE COUP actis nU doivent ied tte Emu ee Lose Re 173 0 17 JJBIemonbtyDOStussdc MEI EA m LM EACUS os Maks INE SU 174 6 2 COLOR Ale MESH ESTO PALETTE 175 OZ MES s CON CTO betta 176 6 2 1 1 Central EF EMOD ONS 176 6 2 1 2 Moa Dai 177 6 2 1 3 ET CMICHEDICICTEN COS Sessa eet da ee PGBS EAT AAR E UA PE CC EAA OR 178 6 2 1 4 D Et Pons Su te tk Na 179 6 2 1 5 COITOS 01008712 181 6 2 1 6 COTTOSIOMAGAHION CSR BULK example eiecti ee a e Aen ERRARE COL AED A PER RR AERE LER etica 183 6 2 1 7 COLNE DECIOFONGOY Gesta aO e UO 184 6 2 1 8 IN 185 2 1 9 THES PI I MEM 185 OT AME ES De ait ni dan laide de da iii ii du dant ie 187 019229 PE E 188 Od ACUS OTS 189 t eee SD M eM 190 02 9 WESTIE SCO ES ICO sis d ind 190 02 4 s OMR CAO 192
11. The remaining analysis activities for wave and pile soil analysis are not relevant for plate and shell structures More information about these analysis activities can be found in the User Manual Vol I and II When an analysis is performed the status Activity Monitor E field in the activity monitor contains Start Cancel relevant information Typically if the analysis is successful or if there 1s warning error messages Journal activity executions Activit Duration Status Generate Input To find more information about the CEE problem RMB the relevant activity MA 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 15 Success select the listing file or maintenance file 4 1 1 2 Generate loads 1s SUCCESS and search for the error message In this A 11 3 Delete mesh Os Surte case the Sestra listing file is searched for m 1 1 4 Generate mesh 05 SUCCESS k Sonn AS Error the expression error Notice that the default editor is MS Notepad In case you have associated another editor with the file type L S this will overrule the default editor The example below shows the Sestra listing using WordPad sestra lis WordPad P File Edit View Insert Format Help peal elk al 5 0 fwesten A m z u amp MASS MATRIX CENTROID MB 1 3 Load Results SUCCES p sestra inp sestra lis sestra mnt 4 7903E 0Z 38
12. Em3 do not intersect Bm2 eccentric Em2 Em3 Essential structural properties This check will list structural parts that have not been assigned section property thickness property or material property If some of these are missing the structural analysis will fail Interactive model checking This option will check your model every time you do an update to your model You should Oo Edges shorter than 0 01 m m shorter than 0 02 remember to set the search criteria for each M Detect Sliver Faces 0 07 m ml 5 E Edge length 0 01 shorter than 0 02 project ate D Edge length 0 01 shorter than 0 02 It is recommended that you use this feature Edge length 0 01 shorter than 0 02 T 5 Edge length 0 01 shorter than 0 02 it is program default but with no criteria 2 Sliver faces 0 02 s E Sliver face at pos specified Sliver face at pos Typically if you copy a plate 0 005m or a IV Enable interactive error reporting orn small value you may create unwanted short ow Co edges and vertices In this case you will be prompted with the following message Automatic geometrical consistency check When this option is activated it will perform a geometrical consistency check each time you save your model Free plate edges It is also possible to visualize free plate edges plate edges not connected to other object
13. Liquid Type Density 025 Kg m 3 lt q Compartment Content LJ Corrosion Addition Hinges It is possible to specify a number of liquid types and depending on the type different colours are used when visualising the content In the example below four eoe liquid contents have been defined and applied to four compartments Liquid Water Ballast 24 May 2008 12 22 UM Comp Analysis Whole Comp filling FEM Loadcases The colours used are e Blue Water ballast e Light blue Fresh Water e Yellow Fuel Oil Heavy Fuel Oil Lube Oil Oil e Turquoise Heavy Liquid Liquid Z Y Property R M Ballast water X Drink water M Diesel B Mud DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 131 15 September 2011 The default filling of a compartment is Ims 100 i e the compartment is full The Object Properties Content Fill Height Compartment Loads filling degree is modified by selecting a compartment RMB select Fill Height and Reference point specify the fill height fraction the fill height ig ty the cargo volume or the cargo mass H Replace Z with fill height The example to the right shows that the fill height fraction 1s set to 0 75 Observe that the Fil height fraction h H 0 75 volume of the compartment is also C Fill height HI 5m m calculated in this case 986 m Cargo Volume v 385 7094603 m
14. dii Lud Pm Lud L 4 Force quadratic elements we Prefer rectangular mesh Hinges 4 Prefer rectangular elements Qe Prefer rectangular mesh but allow triangles if E Hydro 4 Remove internal vertices u necessary to make a mesh Lupe 4 Remove internal edges Qe If you do not set this to true or false the Materials a Mesh Mesh Options L3 Permeability wv Overide mesh strategy meshing rule defaultis used Advancing front quad mesher gt Advancing front triangle mesher Sesam quad mesher Represent the mesh option for faces If vau da nat set this to true or false the meshing rule default is used Remove internal vertices RES Remove internal edges Eliminate edges not required to represent the model This option can be used to reduce the number af patches on a plate that needs to meshed separately Some examples on varying local mesh parameters are shown in the Ifyou do nat set this to true or false the following meshing rule default is used 07 May 2008 00 01 07 May 2008 00 03 UM Mesh9 UM Mesh9 Y Y A model with 6 plates PI2 gt PI7 Local mesh parameters above option AFQM specifying Advancing Front Quad Mesher applied to plates P15 P16 and PI7 The rest of the plates are meshed with the global mesh setting the Sesam Quad Mesher Hence the mesh 1s different on the upper part as compa
15. Create Point Name Point Position Point 2 222222222 m 8 333333333 HEFT The new guiding point is shown to the right IA Guide Point You may also define a guide point by clicking on 1 snap point You do this from the InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Point or from the tool button as shown to the right Guide Line The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each guide point you 1 ke sire LJ Poly Curve create the default name 1s Point Guide Arc Eliptic n Guide Circle Typically if you repeat this process 3 times with different co ordinate values you Will model curve have 4 guide points to draw a poly curve or guide spline between 7 let Curves The guide point may be modified from selecting the line RMB and Properties DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 22 15 September 2011 3 2 3 Guide line A guide line may be defined from the InsertlGuiding Geometry Guide Line Dialog Insert te Beam Plate Name i Support Guide Plane Dialog Cancel Joint Poly Curve Dialog Define end points Mass Guide Line Dialog 1 x Compartment Fillet Curves Dialog d n End 2 ane Guide Point Dialog Linear Slicer RH Guide Plane Guide Point Guide Line Guiding Geometry Profile Guide Spline Equipment Lib CUm You
16. LoadCase Factor Phas Description px Ekr Wind East 0 Reference to Lo Mix Wind_North 0 Reference to Lo Wind West 0 LoadCase Explicit Load Load Case Load Combination Environment Equipment Load Case Properties In_place_comb General Loads Combination Design Condition LoadCase Factor Phase Shift Description Q wind East 1 0 Reference to LoadCase Oe Wind_North 0 Reference to LoadCase r Odeg LoadCase Combination In_place_comb x Wind_West Scale factor fi 4 Phase shift Show all loadcases Load case 0 deg deg Cancel UM Name Description FEM Loadcase C Analysis In place step 1 Meshing 5 08 Activities In place step 2 Linear Structural Analysis Static 2 9 In place R In place step 3 Load Results La In_place ste place comb LoadCombination 2p n place ste Wind West LoadCase R In place ste Common loadcombination Reference to LoadCombination Installation Rr Wind East Reference to LoadCase Installation s zx wind North Reference to LoadCase Kg Installation s Installations Transport Transport ste Transport ste Transport ste Load Cases by Capacity It is not recommended to have a mix of load combinations created both in the Load Case and analysis activity folders For wave load analysis typically jacket o
17. amp amp KH from InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Circle or from the tool button as shown to the i i right The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each guide circle leaks you create the default name is Curve mye a Guide Arc Elliptic Model Curve Fillet Curves A guide arc elliptic is a curved built up by referring to 1 the origin 2 the radius and 3 a point to define the circle plane Since points 1 2 and 3 form a horizontal plane the circle will be horizontal with the origin in point and a radius equal to the distance between point 1 and 2 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 26 15 September 2011 3 2 8 Model curve Model curves may be inserted between two points or along a topology line The difference between a model curve and a straight guiding line is that the model curve will follow the surface curvature The command is activated from Insert Guiding Geometry Model Curve or from the tool Guide Point button as shown to the right The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of guide tine each model curve you create the default name is Curve ow Spline Poly Curve fq Guide Arc Elliptic n Guide Circle Beam Plate Support Model Curve eS SS Guide Plane Dialog Fillet Curves Joint Poly Curve Dialog Mass Guide Line Dia
18. 4 Force quadratic elements v Prefer rectangular elements 4 Remove intemal vertices Remove intemal edges Override mesh strategy f Advancing front quad mesher C Advancing front tangle mesher Sesam quad mesher eed 07 May 2008 01 40 UM Mesh10 The mesh option RECT is defined to force quadratic elements on plates P11 P12 and As can be seen rectangular elements are now made as compared to a more quadratic shape as in the previous example when using the QUAD property For the two other options Remove Internal Edges and Remove Internal Vertices please see the definitions in Section Global Mesh Settings for further details The parameter settings for Mesh Options for Edge works the xj same way as for Mesh Options for Face but there are fewer options For a description on how to use a linear distribution of the mesh in transition zones please see previous Section anu Iv Allow edit Global Mesh Settings Remove internal vertices T w verde mesh strategy Uniform distribution Linear distribution Mesh Options for Edge Mesh Options for Face DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 200 15 September 2011 6 4 Refine mesh zones GeniE will automatically create the mesh in the transition between surfaces with different mesh densities By using the mesh growth parameter as shown in the previous Section it is possible to
19. 7 p1 E p2 pl Point 0 m 5 m 0 m p2 Point 10 5 m 0 m Footprints Generic Line Load Function Component d function component dFunction param return Vector3d 0 500 math cos param 360 0 Description Line Line Load Name LLoad14 Load Intensities Function param Intensities return Vector3d 0 500 math cos param 360 deg 0 v Parametric Local coordinate system The load is described as Fy 500 cos x 360 where 0 gt x lt 1 The corresponding Javascript command is return Vector3d 0 500 math cos param 360 deg 0 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 103 15 September 2011 Similarly for a vertical load Name 3 Footprints E P p2 pl Point O m 5 0 m p2 Point 10 m 5 m m Generic Line Load Function Componentl d function component dFunction param return Vector3d 0 0 500 math sin param 360 deg Intensities v Parametric Local coordinate system The load is described as Fz 500 sin x 360 where 0 gt x lt 1 The corresponding Javascript command is return Vector3d 0 0 500 math sin param 360 deg For both loads the angular unit is degrees in this case You may learn more about mathematical functions from the Help pages under Jscript commands Math you find this under the chapter Other
20. Corrosion Addition ef Compartments EE Environment Tc 5mm Elle ect E Equipment ee Ef Properties Corrosion Additions Eom __ TER FT Addition Additional thickness Emm all visible properties Save HTML Report Cancel Apply In the example below the corrosion additions Tc 5mm and Tc 7mm have been applied to some selected plates and stiffeners outside side only 04 May 2008 17 45 UM_Mesh2 Analysis Whole 04 May 2008 17 53 Thickness 0 01725 0 02 0 02625 0 02725 0 03 Corrosion additions applied Net scantlings as used in analysis select mesh RMB and click colour code thickness In the example above corrosion addition of 7mm is applied to a plate with thickness 30mm The net thickness 15 thet tgross 0 5 te 30mm 0 5 t 30mm 0 5 7 5mm 30mm 0 3725mm 26 25mm DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 184 15 September 2011 where te max 2mm RoundupOS t t2 0 5mm max 2mm Roundup05 7mm 0 5mm te max 2mm 7mm 0 5mm 7 5mm The web and flange thickness of the selected beam is also reduced with the thickness correction t 7 5mm To verify this you need to edit the FEM file A new section property will automatically be created for the beams that have corrosion additions Other preferences 6 2 1 7 Other preferences Include unused properties When you mak
21. Gant Undo geometries RMB and select Delete Copy or Move Alternatively you can select Cx Carit Redo the object and use the pulldown menu as shown to the right It is also possible to use Set short commands like CTRL T same as copy and DEL for delete EB X Delete Once you have performed a copy move or delete operation they are permanent You may use the undo features CTRL Z for undo and CTRL Y for redo to step back or forward Alternatively you can use the undo redo dialog and directly go several steps back or forward the undo redo history is closed when saving the workspace Properties Rules In the following there are examples on how to do delete copy translation copy rotation copy mirroring copy 3 point positioning and copy using a scale factors Move is identical to copy except that no new objects are created the objects subjected to move are modified Delete objects The example below shows how to delete guiding curves using the context sensitive menu RMB SE Genie_voG_revised Name Deme jj H Analysis L Curve6 Guide Spline Capacity ere Lg Environment Ta Curved Guide Line EE Equipment 1 Guide Circle Movo i Weight Lists Create Beam Properties Create Support Curve Structure Lj Utilities En Evaluators Edit PolyCurve 5 8 Guiding Geometry Join Ly Curves Divide Points LJ Profiles Cover Curves Lg Transformations Mesh Priorities Rena
22. 1 concept model The model includes boundary conditions for both the global model the whole structure and for the edges describing a local model Two sets are made the set Global model includes everything except the internal boundary conditions Similarly the set Local model describes the part close to the incoming brace including the internal boundary conditions see picture below DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 209 15 September 2011 Per default GeniE will mesh the entire structure To specify which parts or which named set to be meshed you need to edit the mesh activity from the browser or from the activity monitor UM Mesh14 Analysis Analysis1 step 1 Meshing C Activities Analysisl step 2 Linear Str Edit Mesh Activity e R Analysisl step 3 Load Results 2 98 Analysis Analysis ste Analysis1 ste Journal activity executions R Analysis1 ste 9 Load Cases Activity Duration Status Generate Input M 1 115 Success BO m E M 1 1 1 Delete loads M 1 1 2 Generate loads 55 M 1 1 3 Delete mesh Os Success M 1 1 4 Generate mesh 2s Success M Er 1 2 Linear Structural Analys 95 Success MR 1 3 Load Results Os Success t Activity Monitor Eig S In the first example the named set Global model 15 used when making the finite element model The corresponding mesh is shown 19 May 2008 15 37 UM Mesh15 Ana
23. 2 S o 2 S 5 en bb 3 lt g wo as Z joined become a Lines that d to form what is known as poly lines be Ines can no means that 1 composite curve d Select the straight lines Curve30 and Curve31 illustrate the Join comman to 1ven Three examples are g 9 8 F 5 N e 5 e 2 3 3 5a i Oo g g ee E 2H 3j A dado 25 E amp S p Sg a Elg M Salg 5 fa 23 8 8 3 8s o 90 9 a gt 55195 918 Properties Named set View options Visible model C curves t Ip te curve Curve29 de arc ell 1 The straight curve Curve25 and the gu Curve26 gt Curve28 becomes the compos 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 45 15 September 2011 Modify using Divide Divide curves can be done using a parameter relative length or true length In both cases the division is relative to the start position of the line end 1 Four examples are displayed to show how the Divide function can be used Select Curve32 RMB and Divide Use parameter 0 8 to divide the curve l Divide x Copy Move Create Beam C Divide Beams and Segments A
24. Kg m 2 Kg m 2 UM Mass Point Mass 3000 10 5 89 709434 46 10000 S000 EDD Matrix Scalar DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 151 15 September 2011 4 6 3 Equipment mass The mass from equipments can be added EE SI to the mass matrix by specifying General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition Represent Equipment as loadcase Environment independent mass There are a number Acceleration id Vecter3d D m s 2 0 m s 2 0 m s 2 of options for this alternative Each one is described in the following Structural 4nalvsis Load and Mass management Delete Explicit Loads Generate Applied Loads C Represent Equipment as loads Notice that each loadcase assigned the equipment mass alternative will add to Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass Beams And Mass the total mass matrix TRE TEE EN Include structure self veight in structural analysis RENTE Footorint M ass There are three options for creating mass models from basic loadcases only e Eccentric mass should be used for hydrodynamic dynamic analysis only e Beams and Mass for hydrodynamic dynamic analysis followed by structural analysis or dynamic structural analysis e Footprint mass all masses are flushed down to the footprint level neglecting the equipment COG 27 May 2008 08 00 UM_Eqpm_Mass To illustrate the differences between the two fir
25. Load Intensities Constant Traction 50 Pa The direction of the traction load is determined by the Guide Direction 1n this case the global X direction in negative direction DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 120 15 September 2011 4 3 3 3 Component loads Select surface load to type Component Load You may choose between Constant and Javascript The first option is shown below the Javascript option is similar to this shown in the Section Pressure loads A component load will set up a constant pressure build up by components in global x y and z directions Constant component load 15 May 2008 11 19 Wet Surface rints Select a wet surface to apply loads on wSS Inner Y FEM Loa decease 7 Foot Description Wet surface Footprint Surface Load Mame SLoad17 Load Intensities Constant SurFace Load 0 0 100 Pa Constant Component Load Component2d Fx Pa Fy 0 Pa Fz 100Pa Intensities Wet Surface Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws_0 uter Y Footprints Constant Component Load Component2d Fx 0 Pa Fy 100 Pa Fz 10 Pa E on c c 15 May 2008 11 22 tube LC8 UM FEM Loadcase 7 Wet Surface Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws_ nner Y Footprints Description Wet surface Footprint Surface Load Name SLoad17 Load Intensities Constant Surface Load Constant Component Load Comp
26. M 0 SESAM USER MANUAL GENIE VOL III MODELLING OF PLATE SHELL STRUCTURES Concept design and analysis of offshore amp maritime structures DET NORSKE VERITAS TM Sesam User Manual GeniE Vol III Modelling of plate amp shell structures Concept design and analysis of offshore amp maritime structures 15 September 2011 Valid from program version 6 0 Developed and Marketed by DET NORSKE VERITAS DNV Software Report No 00 000 Revision 0 15 September 2011 Copyright 2011 Det Norske Veritas Software All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in writing from the publisher Published by Det Norske Veritas Software Veritasveien 1 N 1322 HOVIK Norway Telephone 47 67 57 99 00 Facsimile 47 67 57 72 72 E mail sales software sesam dnv com E mail support software support dnv com Website www dnvsoftware com If any person suffers loss or damage which is proved to have been caused by any negligent act or omission of Det Norske Veritas then Det Norske Veritas shall pay compensation to such person for his proved direct loss or damage However the compensation shall not exceed an amount equal to ten times the fee charged for the service in question provided that the maximum compensation shall never exceed USD 2 millions In this provision Det Norske Veritas shall mean the Foundation Det Norske Veritas as well as all it
27. Support gt Mass p Pi p2 Compartment pl Point 0 0 m p2 Point m 0 m 0 m Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry Profile 2 G Equipment Explicit Load Point Load n 100 de t2 100 deg Load Case Line Load Load Combination Surface Load Environment Prescribed Displacement Line Temperature Close Apply The example below shows a constant and linearly varying temperature loads applied to two beams The load may be labelled modified and deleted from the graphics window select the load RMB and choose one of the available options Create Line Load 05 Apr 2008 09 12 temp BI Load LC1_Const_Temp Name FEM Loadcase 1 Beam Bm5 Parameter positions Start 0 2 End Description Line Temperature Load Name LLoadi Load Intensities Linear Temperature Load 1 100 delc 2 500 delC e Copy Transform Move Transform fi 00 deg t2 500 ded Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Close Apply Named set View options Visible model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 107 15 September 2011 The temperature loads may also be verified from the load case property dialogue box Select General Equipment
28. The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each poly curve you create the default name is Curve Guide Spline Guide Arc A poly curve is a curved built up of straight segments and spline segments It is lt Guide Circle characterised with a constant tangential along its line Model Curve Fillet Curves DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 24 15 September 2011 You may use multiple points when defining the curve and the curvature is controlled by the number and position of the points along the line The example to the right shows a poly curve generated by 5 points double click on the last point to stop the curve You may edit the curve by changing the co ordinates or the curve type The curve may be edited by selecting the curve RMB and Edit Polycurve L Poly Curve Name Fit Curve View Curve definition Auto Curve Type Cancel Label curve points m Y m z m Curve Tvpe 2 22222 8 33533 0 Straight 2 22772 3 33333 Spline 3 85559 2 5 Spline 6 11111 3 33333 Straight 611111 8 33339 Spline i Mova Spline Create Beam Create Support Curve Spline Spline 1 2 3 4 6 9 a Create Feature Edge Spline Join Spline Divide Spline Cover Curves Spline Delete Spline Rename EN KN E p E E 8 I E I8 I 8 Er The
29. 04 43 902 17E 04 515508 E 04 5433083E 04 5571336E 04 64503 7SE 04 50762 7OE 04 OO 8 ma CCC I I I I I I I I I I I I tHHHHHHHHHHHH GeniE 218 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 30 May 2008 13 49 UM Diff Analysis Analysis 1 LC Static Force N Length m FEM Loadcase 1 Displacements All deformed Min Max 0 0283983 2 839827 002 2 621379 002 2 40293 16 002 2 184482e 002 1 966034e 002 1 747586e 002 1 529138e 002 1 310689 002 1 09224 16 002 8 73 7930 003 6 55344 76 003 4 368965e 003 2 184482e 003 0 000000e 000 Activity Duration Status Generate Input M 9 1 Analysis1 Analysis 05 Mot Started 1 1 Meshing Always Regen Os Mot Started M 1 1 1 Delete loads Os Hot Started M 1 1 2 Generate loads 05 Mot Started M 1 1 3 Delete mesh Os Hot Started M 1 1 4 Generate mesh Os Mok Started M kr 1 2 Linear Structural Analys Kr Edit activity 1 3 Load Results Os 30 May 2008 14 14 UM Diff Analysis Eigenvalue Eigenvalue EIGEN 1 Force N Length m FEM Loadcase 1 Eigen Frequency 3 74135 Hz Eigen Ang Freq 23 5076 rad Eigen Period 0 267283 te Displacementse Min 0 Max 0 062164 503692e 002 3 825504 002 3 347316 002 2 869128e 002 2 390940e 002 1 912752e 002 1 4345646 002 9 563760 003 4 781880e 003 0 000000E 000 re lt gt lt
30. API_Spec_2Y 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 448 API_Spec_2Y 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 483 thick 345 0 3 API_Spec_2MT2 7850 2 1E11 0 03 450 n qu mm 131 315 0 03 470 Grade_DH32_EH32 131 350 0 03 490 Grade_DH36_EH36 ASTM A537 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 485 Class I to 212 in mmm thick ASTM A633 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 435 ns ee ASTM_A633 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 485 ASTM_A678 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 485 ns ASTM_A913_Grade_5 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 450 0 enews d ole DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 240 15 September 2011 ASTM_A537 Class to 2 in thick ASTM A678 Grade B API Spec 2W Grade 60 to 1 in thick API Spec 2Y Grade 60 to 1 in thick ASTM 710 Grade A Class 3 through 2in DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 241 15 September 2011 Standard Grade Pa Kg m 3 n B m B D EUROCODE Yield Density Young Poisson Thermal Damping Tensile Strength Modulus Ratio Coefficient Factor Strength EN 10025 4 275 M ML 7850 2 1E11 S355_M_ML 7850 2 1E11 EN 10025 3 420_M_ML 7850 2181 S460 M ML 7850 2181 EN 10025 5 5235 5355 W EN 10025 6 5460 OL EN 10210 1 235 H 275 H 8355 H 7850 2E BENE eee eee eye DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 242
31. ME Load Sum ME Load Combination Load Details Conc ME Load Details Appl ME Point Load ME Line Load ME Surface Load Temperature Load Support Displacem ME Equipment Load Hip Save Report Report format z Analysis Analysis1 File name um1 Descon nl im Zim Pressure Pa POPAT EY Pal FP RN Surface Surface Load Constant Surface Load 3000 2000 0 et Pa nt Ti Allloadcases Only PL Pressure Model Id Sign um1 nek URN Date A May 2008 Model file name Last saved C Program Files DNYS GeniE_D4009 Workspaces um 01 May 2008 03 23 24 1 2 7 PL Pressure Surface Load gt PL Pressure Surface Load Sorted by Name Ascending ds 3 9 5 8 of 000 3 99 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 114 15 September 2011 4 3 2 Surface loads on shells Surface loads on shells can be applied to a wet surface The wet surface is then used to define the footprint of the loads In addition to wet surfaces loads on curved surfaces may be defined if they cover the whole surface of a given named plate A tube having two wet surfaces 1s used to describe how surface loads can be applied to shell structures 4 3 3 Define wet surfaces The procedure to make a wet surface 1s to define it as a property and connect it to a plate shell surface s The property is defined from EditlPro
32. Some characteristics for design load based analysis e Apply explicit loads directly to beams stiffeners plates or shells Examples of explicit loads are point loads line loads and surface loads e Place equipments This will generate line loads or inertia loads accounting for the equipment s centre of gravity footprints and which beams are designated to carry the equipment mass e Inertia loads These are loads that are computed by the program multiplying the mass structure point mass equipment mass with a gravity field constant or varying like e g a centripetal acceleration field e The compartment filling is computed by GeniE to pressure loads You may also define explicit pressure loads inside a compartment e Incase you are using the Nauticus Hull rules for CSR Bulk the load conditions explicit pressure loads are automatically defined for you based on your compartment definitions For models to be used in a hydrodynamic analysis direct analysis e The model normally consists of mass structure point mass and equipment compartment content defining which compartments to be part of hydrodynamic analysis and explicit loads e tis also common to make different hydrodynamic models like the panel model defining outer wetted surface the structure model defining typically the compartments and their contents and the mass model e The hydrodynamic analysis will provide surface loads and accelerations in addition to
33. adds to mass model There are four finite element nodes inside the footprints Mesh density increased so that there are twelve finite element nodes inside the footprints Hence twelve eccentric mass elements are created When applying a horizontal acceleration to a loadcase containing the equipment correct displacements are computed but the bending moments are not correct the peaks are much higher compared to a real case The reason is that the connection between the one node eccentric mass elements and structure is fixed in all degrees of freedom and hence moments are computed In a realistic case there are only vertical and lateral forces to be transferred from the equipment and no moment transfer these forces will set up some moment effects but not as large as shown below This is the reason why this approach should only be used for hydrodynamic analysis if dynamic structural analysis shall be carried out the next alternative for mass representation should be used The pictures below show displacements and the undesired bending moments due to a horizontal acceleration component The displacements will be realistic but the moments are unrealistic 27 May 2008 08 20 eilE 042 11 Date 27 May 30 082400 UM Eqpm Mass Analyse Bm4 LC1 Mxy LC1 Force N Length m FEM Loadcase 1 Displacements All deformed Min 0 Max 1 85825 005 1 8582516 005 1 715309 005 1 57236 7 005 1 429424 005 1
34. densities vary typically from coarse mesh to fine mesh When the default option Uniform distribution 1s used GeniE will seek to create the mesh transition zones as short as possible In the case Linear Distribution is activated the mesh transition zone will be in accordance with the settings specified on the mesh property GeniE 187 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Edge mesher Uniform distribution C Linear distribution Create Edit Mesh property Mesh Density Number of elements Md mid Mew meshDensity v Allow edit Element Length D 25 v Growth rate fi Dd m Element Length E 3 04 May 2008 20 50 UM Mesh8 025m 0 5m Mesh Density E Md coarse Md fine Md mid k 04 May 2008 20 51 UM Mesh8 k A model with 3 different mesh settings The default mesh using Sesam quad mesher 04 May 2008 20 57 UM Mesh8 k 04 May 2008 20 59 UM Mesh8 Sesam quad mesher Linear distribution growth rate 1 04 for Md_mid and Md_coarse Sesam quad mesher Linear distribution growth rate 1 01 Internal edges for mid plate shown DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 188 15 September 2011 6 2 1 11 Scantling idealizations aude Usage and meaning of the Thickness combo box 15 G Thickness ms described in chapter Error Reference source not found An example of usage is given in ch
35. e Non structural plates e Line loads on shells e Surface loads on shells e Temperature loads Note that no higher order elements are supported with this import method DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 228 15 September 2011 Note that other changes will make it necessary to regenerate the mesh causing the element node numbers to change An example of such a change is adding a beam or a plate By default when importing a FEM file the Regenerate mesh option is set to Never Regenerate Mesh Under such circumstances if you have done changes that make regenerating mesh necessary and then run the mesh Hd Ecce sess onore Always Regenerate Mesh m er oa Smart load combinations T activity by clicking on the button Start on the activity Conditional Regenerate Mesh A4 Mever Hegenerate Mesh Override Global Superelement monitor the generated FEM file will not reflect the changes that are made However user can bypass this default setting by either change the Regenerate mesh option or explicitly type in the JS command in the Set Mesh Priority GeniE command window Mesh Subset Pile boundary condition File Soil Interaction teen 5uperelement Type Superelement Type The FEM import retrieves all data found on the FEM file piles and overlapping beams included For overlapping beams the inner and outer beams shou
36. 1 m 0 m The constant traction load is defined by intensity and a direction In this case the guide direction is in global y direction Linear varying traction Mone Stoadtt PL_Pressure Define at least 3 corner points FEM Loadcase 4 1 Point 0 m0 m 5 m Point 10 m 5 Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m Point O m 10 5 Footprints Surface Normal Vector3a 0 m0 m 1 m h Description Surface Traction Name SLoadi Load Intensities Linear varying TractionS00 Pa m x Linear Pressure Function Create a pressure function described by the equation kl k2 yek3 z4k4 0m 7 Pa m o Pa m 0 Pa m Pa m 1000 Pa Guide Direction 00 2 wo c D Cc As for the constant traction the linear varying traction load is governed by a direction and intensity consisting of a constant part and variable parts along global x y or z directions In this case the guide direction 15 along the global x direction DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 112 15 September 2011 Three point varying traction L Create Surface Load 01 May 2008 03 00 um Name SLoadi2 PL_Pressure Define at least 3 corner points FEM Loadcase 4 1 Point 0 m0 m 5 m Point 10 5 m Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m Point O m 10 m 5 m Footprints Surface Normal Vectorad 0 0 m Description Surface Traction Name SLoadi 1 Load Intensities Three po
37. 15 September 2011 8275 NH NLH 8355 NH 5420 NH 5460 NH EN 10219 1 S235H S275H S355H S275_NH_NLH S355_NH_NLH S460_NH_NLH 275 MH MLH 355 MH 5420 MH MLH 5460 MH MLH
38. 2 Design load based analysis manual load application 130 4 4 2 1 f AANE A 130 4 4 2 2 I RE TR 130 4 4 2 3 SONL COMME 133 4 4 2 4 Man uallydetnedcompartiment loads at t a n p Ee V den 135 4 4 5 Design load based analysis rule based load application 136 444 Direct analysis transfer compartment data to HydroD sss enne eene 136 4 5 EQUIP MENT LOADS 140 Zo Crede egu MENS era A 140 4 2 Ediine ine COG and he JOO discs otis 140 2 DIN CI T atu ue ELM T T ME ML EL 142 434A Cre nnplorces from placed EQUIPMENT LR 143 40 2 WeriviheubDlied Todd Teirin E den cn aot 147 4 6 MASSES AND INER UP S OA ND needed Y 148 NOS UNS AOL 148 LO OS id LM C A au SLM Ca 150 LOS LUPI MENU 151 4 6 3 1 Mass model TOF dr ro names era D WE e into 151 4 6 3 2 Mass model Tor Structural eae ete EE LORD T Va E CHER OO 153 4 6 3 3 Mass model WHEN neelectng a ee e ve oa elata vent esca te e cee 154 4 7 VERIFY AND DOCUMENT LOADS AN
39. 201 15 September 2011 The mesh can be improved by inserting an extra rectangular zone in this case by adding a new plate New edges are now part of the model and this will guide the meshing in addition to the other settings 08 May 5 UM_Megh12 08 May UM_Megh12 Regular plates Sesam Quad Mesher Mesh densites Inner 0 25m Mid 0 5m Outer 1 0m Program default settings 08 May 08 May UM Medhi2 UM Megh12 QUE BS Advancing Front Mesher Advancing Front Mesher Growth rate 1 10 on mid plate As can be seen from the example above the introduction of an extra mesh transition zone significantly improves mesh quality when using the Sesam Quad Mesher The mesh created when using the Advancing Front Mesher has relatively high quality for the plates without the extra mesh transition zone However an extra layer will increase the mesh for this mesh option too DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 202 15 September 2011 08 May UM_Me 08 May UM_Me Relative Jacobi determinants with no extra zone Relative Jacobi determinants with extra zone The following example shows a plate with a circular part in the middle 08 May 200 UM Mesh13 Regular plates Inner 0 25m Outer 1 0m Sesam Quad Mesher and Program default settings 08 May 200 UM Mesh Advancing Front Mesher Advancing Front Mesher amp Growth rate 1 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol II
40. 2011 4 5 5 Verify the applied loads There are several ways of verifying that the equipments are placed and loads calculated as intended You may graphically verify by moving the mouse over the equipment where the Description Prism Equipment Mame Drill rig Full mouse tooltip will show you some of the details primarily focusing the quality Load offset 1 24856 007 Unbalanced Moment lt 0 0 00734901 0 gt of the computations For a balanced system the load offset and unbalanced Unbalanced Farce lt 00 0 gt force and moments should be small More detailed information may be Load Case Properties ESS FA found from the loadcase property General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition dialogue Environment Acceleration field ctor3dlD m s 2 0 m s 2 3 80665 m s 2 The front property page summarises the mass of all equipments added to Structural Analisis Load and Mass management the loadcase This leads to the Delete Explicit Loads Generate Applied Loads conceptual load masses Represent Equipment as loads accelerations A balanced system C Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass should have the same conceptual load Include structure self weight in structural analysis Iv Include structure mass with rotation fiel as the applied load sum of all the EE m computed beam forces Mass Kg 6000 Explicit conceptual load M COG 19 75 13 5 17 5 Ma loads Applied
41. 286482e 005 1 143539e 005 1 000597 005 p lt 1 429424e 006 0 000000 000 Brrid L 1 The option Eccentric Mass should be used for a subsequent hydrodynamic analysis only Distance from end m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 153 15 September 2011 4 6 3 2 Mass model for structural dynamics When creating a mass model for structural dynamics it is important to avoid the undesired bending moments as discussed above GeniE will do this automatically by inserting additional elements with hinges 1 e no rotational connections between the mass element and the structure This technique is referred to as tripod tent or chicken feet To be able to do so it is required to add sectional and material data to the equipment This information is added from the equipment property sheet DEMO ae aly UNO OI equivalent inis assigned to the Object Properties Section Material Equipment Load Interface Local System equipment FO RENE equipment property Hame Use Description Diameter Thicknes sheet select the equipment RMB Pipe Section sy 15 0 0 Properties a iH1 Section JE IHS Section Normally equivalent sections are used A HETDUUB Section JE HEFUUBE Section addressing no side effects when e g e ummy ipod 1 General Section performing eigenvalue analysis EUXE Box Section Also it is common to use a materia
42. 3 m 3 Cargo Mass M 1010352197 Kg Ka Cancel i The above fill height fraction is applied to the compartment filled with water ballast The compartment view to the right is automatically updated The surface loads are automatically generated when you make a finite element model or you run an analysis It is also possible to manually generate the surface loads by selecting the loadcase RMB and Generate Applied Loads The loads may be visualised and verified from e g the loadcase property dialogue As can be seen the compartments are filled to the top except for one Furthermore there are no pressure acting on the top plate an example of pressurized compartments is shown in the following Some of the plates are removed for better visibility of the loads Load Case Properties Comp_filling General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition pplied Compartment Pressure pos Om 35 36 m 3 55152 4 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos2 17 36 m 35 36 3 55162 4 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos3 17 36 m 35 36 m D Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos4 Om 35 36 m D Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos5 35 36 27581 2 pplied Compartment Pressure pos Om 31 36 m T 110325 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos2 17 36 m 31 36 m 7 110325 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos3 17 36 m 27 36 m 7 110325 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos4 Om 27 36 T 110325 Pa pplied
43. 40 UM Mesh UM Mesh Analysis 1 Analysis1 lative Jacobi gt lt E VVVVA EE ON A The rest of this Chapter explains how to control and improve the mesh so that it can be used to derive reliable stresses and displacements depending on the type of analysis to be performed typically global analysis local stress analysis or fatigue analysis 03 May 2008 17 47 03 May 2008 17 51 UM_Mesh UM_Mesh Analysis1 Analysis ea Relative Jacobi lt 1 Y Y B gt 1 l l SE gt 1 X X B gt 2 gt 4 Chapter 7 Make analysis models and run analysis explains how to make different analysis models or finite element models from the same concept model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 174 15 September 2011 6 1 7 Element types GeniE can create both 1 and 2 order elements when creating a finite element model You choose which element formulation to use either from the rules setting for mesh generation EditlRules Meshing The following finite element mesh types are generated and exported to the FEM file More details about each element type may be found in Sestra User Manual 2 node beam element BEAS aida kena node beam element 9 beams can be used in code checking Quadrilateral flat thin shell element flat thin shell element FTRS Triangular flat thin shell element FQUS when G mesh rules to split elements Quadrilateral sub pa
44. C Divide Guide Curves C Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Plates C Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates Divide plate using input curve Curve28 C Divide plates with plane zig 2 Arbitrary Y X Z coord DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 78 Repeat the same process at top wing by inserting guide curves and use fillet curve option A radius of 650mm 15 used as shown below for the two other corners 800mm is used L Fillet Curves First Curve Curves at Poini 83 19663342 m T Second Curve Curve34 at Point 83 1967926 m11 Radius 650mm ame When the fillet curve operation is complete you can divide the upper plate and remove the superfluous part The web frame has one man hole in this example it is made using the profile punching Prior to punching a profile must be made typically from Insert Profile The punch operation can now be performed and the man hole is automatically created 1 e the punch will do both divide and delete Profile Punch Cut Manhole New Profile User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 lll Guide Profile Properties Rounded Rectangle Manhole Y i 0 6 y Height 2 Width Cancel Apply Profile start position Action Point 840 m 1 2 m 0 3 m 64 Punch C Cut m Sweep direction Sweep length fi 00
45. Compartment Pressure pos Om 35 36 m 3 55162 4 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos2 17 36 m 35 36 m 3 55162 4 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos3 17 36 m 35 2237 m 4 72057 m 69439 5 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos4 17 36 m 34 8241 m 5 625 82743 6 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos5 17 36 m 34 1884 m 6 40165 m 94168 1 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos6 17 36 m 33 36 6 9976 m 102934 Pa pplied Compartment Pressure pos 17 36 m 32 3953 m 7 37222 108445 Pa b Ses From Equipments From Explicit Loads C ExplicitLoads Applied Loads DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 132 15 September 2011 The generated loads in the finite element model are shown to the right As can be seen the compartment with 75 filling receives less load Furthermore the loads are different for the other compartments because the contents have different material densities The higher density the larger the load becomes Some of the plates are removed for visibility and hence not all acting pressure loads are shown For more details on how to create a finite element model see Chapter 6 In case you have a compartment that is pressurised e g when filling in a pipe connected to the compartment typically you Properties Object Properties Content Fill Height Compartment Loads can specify the top position of the filling by Reference point modifying the reference point for com
46. DAD LE OR 84 DI Straight or curved beams from guide curves ase e eer te e ae tea eae eI a aede Era e ge oov 84 3 3 5 4 Straight or curved stiffeners from plate or shell edges nimisen nnana aa a ai 85 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 2 15 September 2011 RII 85 3 3 5 6 POS OU A nonton UM EMI AES A E eM E 87 3 0 A OPOLO RY CO COS CANO VELL CCS ud onte 88 LOS VEE TECON CP MORE 90 720 DNU AOC DONS ETE 95 4 MASSES LOADS AND COMPAR TIVIEN LS cesarea et vo Go eaae oro o n Rea Tae ea Ne Ye Eo UE Ne a PEN o ER ee Foe E Nena aenean eene ee e ER Ere 94 4 LOAD CASES ANDILOAD COMBINATIONS tu tese PS NE A D 95 4 2 LOADS ON BEAMS AND STIFFENERS eot d th ee der 97 dar FOr Oad S RAT TT M G m 97 222 odds ON DITES du ss E GE DOMINE Rn E EMI MEM M E ILC E MN 98 Janedouds Ol De eee eed Poe ted 99 4 2 3 1 Fhelineloud asa separate ODIOGU sse a HR ES LOREM EL QR ORE Dae GAB caen 100 4 2 3 2 The line logd referencing the beam OF VASA RECO AVR OR aU 101 4 2 3 3 102 dod Ne MODIS ON DIGIC te 104 22
47. Edit Corrasien Addition When you include the corrosion addition in the mesh generation EditlRules Meshing and activate Scantlings to msNetCSR_Bulk the effective mesh plate thicknesses and stiffener properties are reduced Corrosion Addition M Corr 1mm M Corr 2mm Cor 3mm 24 May 2008 10 25 24 May 2008 10 28 UM Comp UM Comp Analysis Whole Analysis Whole Thickness 0 01825 0 01875 9 i Y 0 19825 k Thickness 0 199 B 002 02 B o2 Fm gt EM eo oe _ Ooo SON nn Effective mesh plate thicknesses with and without corrosion additions are shown above see also Chapter 6 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 130 15 September 2011 4 4 2 Design load based analysis manual load application There are two ways of generating surface loads in a compartment The first option 15 to fill the compartment with a liquid or solid content and specify the filling Pressure loads are now automatically defined based on the acceleration normally gravity for the actual loadcase The surface loads are applied according to the footprint of the content 1 e the load may be applied to parts of a plate The pressure load is always normal to the plates Furthermore it is not necessary to manually create a mesh line along the surface load footprint as GeniE automatically will create finite element loads The quality of
48. Feature Edge Edit PolyCurve Join Divide Cover Curves Delete Rename Move xi EE Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Properties Labels ColorCode Translation vector Vectorad 0 m B m 0 m Named set View options Visible model Connected Preview Cancel DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 35 15 September 2011 If you want extended control of the moving copying you can press the symbol with the two parallel lines to the right in the move copy dialog Translate Rotate Minor Scale 3 Point Postion General Translation Vector Vector3d 10 m 0 m 0 m M Preview Cancel This will open the dialog shown to the right The dialog is set up so that you can move your structure a specified length in the direction that you specify in the dialog Translate Rotate Mirror Scale 3 Point Position Genera Translation sector Vectorad Om 0 m 10 m Global Ix Oo f Local c s of the beam C Angle wrt x axis an plane deg f Two points E The concepts are explained below Global c s Global coordinate system Use this if you want to move your structure a 1 time s specified length along an axis of the e global coordinate system draa IUE Flat plate d Local c s t Plane defined by the points Local coordinate system Use th
49. Insert using extrude This command is available from the InsertlPlatelSweep Curves Dialog or from tool button Insert Tools Help Beam Flat Plate Dialog pe Sweep Curves Dialog Joint EJ Flat Plate Mass P Skin Curves Feature Edge The sweeping is done using one curve to sweep along another curve They can both be curved Some examples are shown below and notice GeniE is not capable of making a surface for all constellations of curves If you experience problems you should split up your structure into minor parts The extrude functionality can be used among others when you want to make structure based on 2D parts Examples of such may be the longitudinal and parallel parts of a semi submersible pontoon or a ship hull based on a web frame How to create 2D parts and extrude these into 3D structures is explained later in this user manual The first example shows how to do it using the Insert Plate Sweep Curves Dialog Select the curve you want to sweep and open up the sweep curve dialog x Curves to sweep from selection Curve1 Sweep curves along Curve Curve2 C Vector Cancel Apply Curvel is automatically filled in the dialog above you may select more than one curve The curve to sweep along must be filled by clicking on the curve or typing in the name in this case Curve2 The pictures to the right shows sweep using a vector The vector can be manually typed
50. Label curve points adds labels to each of the points along the poly curve The Auto Curve Type will seek to make a poly curve with as many straight curve segments as possible Typically a curve with spline segments only becomes a curve with 2 straight and 2 spline segments Curve Type Straight Y hd hs ud vr Curve Type Spline 7 5 2 5 20 Spline 10 5 20 Spline 7 5 7 5 20 Spline Spline Spline 10 5 20 Spline 7 5 7 5 20 Straight Spline DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 25 15 September 2011 3 2 6 Guide arc elliptic A guide arc elliptic is inserted by referencing existing snap points The command is d Le RER activated from Insert Guiding GeometrylGuide Arc Elliptic or from the tool button as S Guide Line shown to the right The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each elliptic arc you create the default name is Curve 4n n Guide Circle A guide arc elliptic is a curved built up by referring to 1 the origin 2 the start and 3 Model Curve stop position of an arc 1 4 circle may be generated when the start and stop positions scien have the same radius and are perpendicular to the centre of the circle The modelling sequence to the rights will give an arc as shown below 3 2 7 Guide circle A guide circle is inserted by referencing existing snap points The command is activated
51. Loads Rotation Field Design Condition the loadcase RMB and select Pr oper ties The epp Load post EE TER 100 delC P Line Temperature Load pos2 8 49728 m 8 07586 m 500 delC temperature load intensities are found under the Line Temperature Load post Om 300 4 Line Temperature Load pos2 Om 300 delC folder Loads Remember to tick the Display Unit Notations if you want to see the units From Equipments Display Unit Notations Jv From Explicit Loads Explicit Loads Applied Loads Cancel 4 2 6 Prescribed displacements A prescribed displacement is a boundary condition combined with the actual displacement or rotation per loadcase A support point needs to be inserted first before the actual displacement or rotation can be defined see the next Chapter on how to define boundary conditions This means that a structure may have several prescribed displacements to the same support point but in different loadcases The highlighted supports below are defined as prescribed displacement in x direction 05 Apr 2008 09 32 x UM1 zd LC Split Object Properties Support Local System FEM Loadcase 1 Name Position Boundary Condition Boundary Stiffness Matrix Boundary conditions Let x change y and z Spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness e fo N m eee JON m N m Let rs change and rz Spring Fixed Free Prescri
52. Mame Load 51 Footprint Wet Surface lv loads an Select a wet surface to apply loads on Footprints Create new w etSurface WS nner 5 Duter h DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 115 15 September 2011 A surface load may be either be a pressure normal to the wet surface a traction load parallel to the wet surface or a component load build up of components in global x y and z directions In addition there is a special type Dummy Hydro Pressure being used to define the extent of a hull and internal tanks subjected to hydrodynamic loads and pressure l Create Surface Load TES 5 Load m QE Constant Wet Surface Point Varying Linear Function Component Load Constant C 3 Point warping C Linear Function Javascript Intensities Intensities Select a wet surface to apply loads on Javascript wS_0 uter e e LL Pressure Constant Constant C 3 Point Yaning C 3 Point Varying C Linear Function C Linear Function C Javascript C Javascript Intensities Javascript 4 3 3 1 Pressure loads Select surface load to type Pressure You may choose between Constant 3 Point Varying linear function and Javascript The three first options are shown in the following The pressure is normal to the wet surface that it is acting on Constant pressure load 15 May 2008 06 36 Wet Surfa
53. Mame Generator Named set View options Visible model Mass fi OOOO Kg Kg Specify Footprint COG offset fram footprint center Veotor3a 0 m m 1 m M Linear varying loads Load case LC eqpm Position DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 Equipments can be used once in a single loadcase A copy of the equipment may be used in the same loadcase but at another position s Select the equipment RMB and Place a copy You place the copy in the same way as described above This example shows that a new equipment is made and positioned next to the User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Place Centre of MN X Move Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model original equipment The new equipment may be renamed from the default Equipment For more details on how to align equipments to sloped decks at the side of a deck or below a deck see Volume I of the user manual 4 5 4 Creating forces from placed equipments There are two different types of load calculation rules e Linearly varying loads This method will always ensure equilibrium between the conceptual load equipment mass x acceleration accounting for the COG and the applied load the line loads as generated by GeniE e Constant loads This method will not ensure equilibrium Default option is to calculate linearly varying loads By de
54. Maximum free relative chord height reason for such is that the limit used 0 25 15 larger Relative chord height is taken as chord height Hehord over than the actual relative chord height of 0 207 in the ZEE ener Teng eee Le LAS is de model above E M Increase mesh density when relative chord height gt 0 25 Cancel 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 194 15 September 2011 When the limit for the relative chord height is reduced to the half value 0 207 2 0 1035 the mesh is refined to satisfy the limit value p As can be seen from above a Y typical relative chord height becomes 0 190 1 913 0 1 which is less than 0 1035 A further refinement of the limit value for the relative chord height 0 207 4 leads to a further improvement of the mesh DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 195 15 September 2011 6 3 Local mesh settings The global mesh settings may be over rid by local mesh settings Local mesh settings may be of types e Number of elements along a line or different mesh densities to various surfaces or lines e Define specific feature edges mesh control lines e Mesh options for face or edge e Mesh locking Each of these options is described in the following 6 3 1 Number of elements along a line The previous Sections described how to apply a general mesh density
55. Mesh Locking Mesh Lock Coo pres Mame Mamed set View options visible model k Node numbers Mode symbols Relative Jacobi Clear Labels 19 May 2008 16 30 i UM_Mesh16 five new positions the mesh lock co 1 ordinates are part of the copy operation When the web frame 15 copied to the 19 May 2008 16 26 UM Mesh16 Analysis 1 As can be seen the mesh for each web frame 1s identical User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 212 15 September 2011 7 RUN ANALYSIS The previous Chapters describe how to make a concept model consisting of structure loads and boundary conditions as well as how to create analysis models or finite element models This Chapter addresses how to run analysis In GeniE it is possible to run the following analysis types using pre defined analysis activities e Linear static Available activities e Linear eigenvalue analysis Iv Meshing Wave Load Activity e Linear structural analysis including wave loads Linear Structural Analysis Pile Soil Analysis M Load Results e Linear structural analysis including wave loads and non linear pile soil analysis The above analysis requires that the model to be analysed is a so called first level superelement For all other analysis types these can be done with ease in Brix Explorer by using pre defined or your own workflows A typica
56. SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 129 15 September 2011 4 4 1 5 Corrosion addition Corrosion addition may be added to a compartment In this case the corrosion addition 15 automatically applied to the right side of the plates pointing towards the inside of the compartment as well as to the stiffeners inside a compartment It is necessary that the stiffeners are assigned eccentricities this 1s used to detect if a stiffener is inside a compartment or not The corrosion addition is applied according to Section 6 2 1 5 In the example below corrosion addition has been applied to three compartments at deck level El Corrosion Additions Create Edit corrosion addition 2s Mew Corrosion Addition Eu Capacity Color code all visible properties Corrosion Addition 2 E Compartments Fields ia Environment Save HTML Report Lom imm Allow edit E Equipment of Properties Additional thickness mr m f7 Beam Types NNI Cm Compartment Content 23 May 2008 14 29 UM_Comp Analysis_ Whole gasp Corrosion Addition Corrosion addition applied as shown to the compartments Select a compartment RMB and click Properties to apply the corrosion addition Properties X Object Properties Corrosion Addition Content Corrosion ddition lt gt no corrosion add Eo imm Conosion ddition Cor 2mm Corosion4ddition 0 002 Cor 3mm Corosion4ddition 0 003 Create
57. SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 220 15 September 2011 8 RESULTS PROCESSING GeniE can do e General post processing deformations plate and beam stresses For more detailed processing like scanning Xtract can be used e Code checking of beams according to offshore standards e Code checking of plates according to the CSR Bulk standard This Chapter gives a short introduction on how to do general post processing for more details Volume I of the User Manual should be consulted Code checking of beams and plates is documented in Volume IV and V of the User Manual To view results you can use one of the pre defined views Results All or Results With Mesh Capacity Models Compartments ce ss Default display Prior to any result viewing you need to set a load case to Current In case you have Mesh AI several analysis activities you also need to ensure that the right one is set to Active Modelling Structure Modelling Transparent Results All Results with Mesh EHE tube Analysis Analysis step Meshing Activities Er Analysis step 2 Linear Structural Analysis Static 5 9 Analysis R Analusis1 stepl3 Load Results a Analysis ste LE Axial Reference to LoadCase oS Analysis ste en LE Comb Reference ta LoadCombination R Analysis ste ex LC Hari Reference to LoadCase E Load Cases EM LC Mass Reference to LoadCase Edit Analysis Generat
58. The example below shows the new mesh after inserting two beams 03 May 2008 16 40 03 May 2008 16 42 UM Mesh UM Mesh Analysis Analysis 6 1 2 Refine mesh by inserting a plate Two vertical plates are inserted below This will add two new vertices in the model to control the mesh These are shown in the mesh view notice that this view shows the mesh of the horizontal plate only 03 May 2008 16 45 03 May 2008 16 48 UM Mesh UM Mesh Analysis 1 Analysis 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 171 15 September 2011 6 1 3 Refine mesh by inserting feature edges It is also possible to add vertices to control the mesh this is done by inserting feature edges InsertlFeature Edge Create Feature Edge es 1 Name FEdae3 m Remember to activate the tool button ame 5 End 1 Point 5 m 1 25 m m Color Erde Poinit2 5 m 8 75 m __ Visigle The model below contains two feature edges in yellow colour There are now enough vertices to make a regular mesh with high quality but not for detailed stress analysis since the mesh density is too coarse 03 May 2008 17 02 UM Mesh Analysis 03 May 2008 17 01 UM Mesh Analysis 6 1 4 Labelling To label a mesh entity select the finite element mesh entire mesh or parts of it click RMB and select Labels The picture below shows the mesh including element numbers black colour node number
59. activating the tick off for linearly varying loads the program calculates constant line loads You may want to do this when e g working with uniform distributed loads UDL Properties Object Properties Section Material Equipment Load Interface Local System Mame Generator The equipment loads are always calculated when creating a finite element mesh wither manually or as a result of running an analysis Specify Footprint COG offset from footprint center Veotor3a 0 m m 1 m 10000 You may also force the program to Linear varying loads calculate loads by selecting the loadcase from the browser RMB and Generate Equipment Loads You normally do this when you make up the loadcases and you want to verify the applied loads DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 144 15 September 2011 The two examples below show the difference between linear and constant note that the mouse tooltip called Load Offset indicates the horizontal distance between the COG of the equipment mass and the COG for the applied load The load offset is an indication of the un balance introduced by choosing constant loads By using linearly varying loads the load offset is 4 60E 06 m in other words equilibrium while the constant line load option yields a load offset 0 53 m a significant offset 26 May 2008 12 42 UM_Pointmass LC_egqpm_tull FEM Loadcase 4 26 May 2008 12 41 UM_Pointmass LC
60. and keep the mesh for these when meshing the entire structure typical example of such is meshing web frames first and lock the mesh for these e Make the mesh using different meshing algorithms The options available are the Sesam quad mesher and an advancing front mesher also known as a paver meshing algorithm It is possible to mix the meshing techniques for the same concept model e Depending on the results you want to achieve you also need to decide on mesh density and type of finite elements to use Normally a finer mesh density gives more correct results and higher order elements e g 8 node quad elements are more accurate than first order elements e g 4 node quad elements However the finer the model is the larger becomes the analysis to be carried out e Make the mesh using different mesh densities for various structural parts It is not necessary to have the same fineness for the entire structure to achieve good results Typically a joint needs fine mesh while it is sufficient to have a coarse mesh for a regular part of the structure this will lead to satisfactory quality of the results while keeping the analysis model as small as possible In these cases you can also decide the mesh growth rate As far as possible GeniE will always create a finite element mesh unless you have specified otherwise by setting thresholds for typically mesh corner angles or ratio aspects The default values used by GeniE are mesh all in one go use
61. and z directions DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 113 15 September 2011 4 3 1 4 Modify and verify surface loads All of the above loads can be edited by graphic selection of the load RMB and choose Copy Transform Properties You may also copy move delete or rename the load Move Transform Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model There are several ways of verifying a load The mouse tool tip feedback in the gr aphics window General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition From the loads pr operty SLoad12 Surface Surface Load pos1 SLoad12 Surface Surface Load pos2 di alogue box SLoad12 Surface Surface Load pos3 SLoad12 Surface Surface Load pos4 e From the load case property dialogue box see the example to the right e From a printed report Use FilelSave Report and make a report that includes the relevant parts needed to document the loads See below for an example Cancel Apply Iv From Equipments Display Unit Notations v From Explicit Loads C Applied Loads amp Report Define Report Name umt Journal report generation Madify Close ME Load Case 2 Analysis Analysis oe E Load Summary Load Summary Cor Load Summary App Load Summary FER Load Summary FER COE Load Summary FER
62. are automatically adjusted when the model is updated typically by moving a bulkhead or adding information like watertight non watertight bulkheads Some examples are shown in 23 May 2008 11 24 UNM Comp Analysis_ Whole the following focusing names visualisation modifications dummy structural plates in case you have an open compartment to be loaded the use of non watertight bulkheads and corrosion addition The model to the right 15 used as a reference case Notice that some of the plates have been removed to illustrate that there are closed volumes in the concept model 4 4 1 1 Visualise and rename The names of the compartments relate to E 3 UM Comp ve L Analysis EB cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 m 23 5 mil the position of the compartments centre 3 P P Lg Capacity ES cm compartment Pont 718 18 43 m 23 5 mi You may rename the compartment name Compartments ES cm compartment Point 8 69 m 23 36 m 3 75 ml to typically Wingtank1_SB E E Environment Ea cm compartment Point B 58 m 31 36 m 3 75 mil Equipment E cm compartment P ainif 6 Be m 23 3b m 3 mil Hg Properties cm 36 M375 M E H Structure ES cm com 4 75 m 28 5 m fog Utilities E3 cn con eere 8 43 m 23 5 mi ES cmcomp Properties 5 m 28 5 mj ES cm comr 8 43 m 29 5 ml ES cm comr 653 m 23 36043653 m 3 7495 BB cm con C906 553 m 3135956347 m 3 7495 ES cm c
63. back to the normal FEU RES onion rane graphics view y Point Vector 3 Paints Determined by coard 10 m Join Flat Regions All the five available bounded regions have been clicked and five plates have been created DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 54 We insert a new plate to demonstrate the possibility for creating plates that are not in the X Y or Z plane The sloping plate to the left has been inserted The plate making up the inner side that would have obscured it has been set to invisible We open the Create Flat Region on Plane again Unlike in the previous example we now select the tab Determined by at the top of the dialog We select the radiobutton FlatPlate and click on the sloping plate from the previous illustration The name of the plate appears in the dialog This time we also choose to check off the checkbox Join Flat Regions Create Flat Region on Plane x y z Peintivector 3 Points Determined by Guide Plane Reset Flat Plate Reset Join Flat Regions Select Flat Regionis in E Close A plane appears in the graphics window User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 55 15 September 2011 As can be seen in the illustration there are a total of three bounded areas that can be used for creating plates Note that because the
64. boundary condition RMB Properties Local System as shown to the right Local system interpretation In stead of the rotate option select specify local f Guide local system Qe Surface normal ge coordinate system Relative to plate Ge To define the local system as e g generated from a 45 degree rotation around the y axis the following Rotate local coordinate system about data needs to be specified The input to the option Local System is C Y ix LocalSystem Vector3d 1 0 1 Vector3d 1 0 1 a The data input in this case is for the local x and z SL axis the y axis is always known when x and z is Local vector vector m 0 m D m given Local vector vectoraato m1 m Alternatively you can specify for individual x and z Local vector rectorat 220446049e 016 m 1 m vectors f Local System LocalSystemiVectorad m m Vectar3d Local x Vector3d 1 0 1 Global System Local y Vector3d 1 0 1 Remember to click apply for each update of the __ Cancel vectors The following example shows a local system including a 45 degree rotation around the y axis followed by a 30 degree rotation around z axis Specify local coordinate system Veotor3d 0 6123724367 m 0 5 m 0 61237243 Local vector Vector3dL0 3535533806 8880254038 m 0 Lacalz vector Vector3di0 7071067812 m 0 m D 7071067812 Local System LecalSustemiVector34 0 61237
65. control the length of the transition zone or how many elements to be used from e g coarse to fine mesh It is advised that you use regular edges by defining surfaces beams or feature edges when changing from a mesh density to another This will guide the program to make a best possible mesh in the transition part The use of Advancing Front Mesher in these regions will in most cases improve the mesh quality but this depends on where you want the best quality in the middle of a surface Sesam Quad Mesher or along its edges Advancing Front Mesher For high control of the mesh you may use number of elements along a line typically edge of a surface to achieve a very regular finite element mesh Some examples are shown in the following Regular plates Sesam Quad Mesher Mesh densites Inner 0 25m Outer 1 0m Program default settings Advancing Front Mesher Advancing Front Mesher Growth rate 1 10 on outer plate DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0
66. does not affect the orientation of the boundary conditions DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 167 15 September 2011 The first step 1s to define the independent point the master node Normally this is the end of the beam as shown to the right LE Insert Support Rigid Link x Mame UM B Rigid Independent paint Point 24 m z m 4 m Boundary condition of independent point The second step is to define the boundary conditions for the master node In this example these are set to free for all degrees of freedom but there may be cases where some of the degrees of freedom have other constraints e g fixed or spring Boundary condition of independent point v Lets change y and Spring Fined Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness ee kN m kN m M Let r change ry and rz spring Free Prescribed Dependent Super stiffness 0 kNm 0 kM m kN m o kH m EN m The third step is to specify the independent points the slave nodes by a volume definition Define the centre of the volume and the extent in x y and z direction The default 15 global x y and z but it is possible to use a local co ordinate system also All finite element nodes inside the volume will become slaves of the master node Region of dependent paints Include all edges in region T C Include only support p
67. eqpm full FEM Loadcase 4 Description Prism Equipment Mame Drill rig Full Load offset 4 60279e 007 Unbalanced Moment lt 0 0150432 0 0225206 0 gt Description Prism Equipment Mame Drill rig Full Load offset 0 525461 Unbalanced Moment lt 22726 2 20960 8 0 gt Unbalanced Force D 0 1 45519e 0117 All beams that are intersecting the footprint will Egg UM Pentmess Analysis Connector Load Interface receive loads In case you want some of the beams to b assit receive loads you can connect the equipment with the 028 Environment Load Interfaces beams in question by using a Load Interface that will i B New Load Interface Fields overrule the global default A load interface is defined 9 Beam Types cn Revert from EditlProperties Load Interface or the browser Log erosion Addition The same load interface can be used for various beams Lm Hinges equipments and loadcases 88 do X Load Interfaces Mass Density Factors In the example to the right the load interface Connector fr iiay2008 1544 UM Pointmass is applied to two beams and the equipment Notice that kesammi FEM Loadcase 4 it is necessary to apply the load interface to both beams and equipments As can be seen there are no loads generated for the intermediate beams ET TEES Description Prism Equipment Drill rig Ful A relevant scenario for using load int
68. equilibrium in warped element may be achieved a posterior for elements developed with respect to a flat geometry through the construction and application of an appropriate projection matrix L Linear Analysis e Eigenvalue analysis It is possible to define solver type and the number of modes For the Multifront Lanczos solver the shift parameter can also be specified For more details please consult the Sestra User Manual Datacheck Only M Automatic generation of input files Analysis type Eigenvalues i Solver Static Analysis Eigenvalue Analysis Number of Modes Shift Advanced egHousehalder egLanczos M Warp Correction 4 node elements eqMultifrontLanczos egS5ubspace DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 217 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 If you want to create your own input file to the Sestra analysis deselect the Automatic generation of input files click on Generate input files and edit the file from the activity monitor or browser Vente arcs Status i Eigenvalue Analysis Success Success Eigenvalues Solver Shift ouseholder Number of Modes 5 ALL S Wo Advanced Success M Warp Correction 4 node elements HP sestra lis Generate input files sestra mnt Any modifications you make to the Sestra input file will now be kept and used until you activate Automatic generation of input fil
69. file from CadCentre PDMS SDMF file Section library Rule Loads XML file External Results SIN file FilelExportlGeniE journal file GENSOD file The data sources that can be imported are XML describing the concept model This file is normally generated by GeniE using an export option FEM file Sesam s neutral file format for finite element models SACS input file STRUCADOGSD input file ACIS SAT format shells only Intergraph PDS sdnf Cadcentre PDMS sdnf Section libraries see also Section 3 1 2 Rule loads XML file This file is defined by Nauticus Hull in accordance with the CSR rules for bulk ships The file contains loads and boundary conditions External Results SIN file Sesam s neutral file format for finite element results Result files from other SESAM programs can be imported for post processing in GeniE See User Manual Volume IV for details The GENSOD file GENSOD inp stores the soil data needed for by SPLICE similarly export of data can be done from FilelExport The following FEM File export operations can be done Results SIM File sML Concept Model FEM file Export and rename a FEM file Intergraph POS SDMF File Results SIN File Export and rename a SIN file CadCentre PDMS SDNF file Genie journal File 15 File Rule Loads xML File ACIS SAT file XML Concept Model Create and export a neutral model file See below for more information
70. given eccentricity Notice that plates and shells are modelled in their neutral axis or top of steel and flush and eccentricity parameters are applied to beams and stiffeners For more details see Vol 1 of the User Manual To insert eccentricities like this you select the stiffener s RMB Edit Beam and choose Offset Vector The stiffeners you select may have different section properties GeniE will automatically detect the offset vectors when flushing them to the shell or plate In the picture to the right the stiffeners have been flushed to the top of the shell to see the eccentricity values select the stiffeners RMB Labels and choose Eccentricities li Edit Beams x Local System Offset Vector Hinges Split Points Move End Translate Buckling Factors Whole beam Specify offset vector C Endi Vector3d 0 m 0 m 0 mj C End2 Vector3d D 0 m 0 m Align section C End1 2 different Alignment E Flush top C No offset centric C Flush Bottom Add constant value OK Cancel i In the example to the right the stiffener is now aligned with the shell using option Flush Bottom Since the profile used 15 not symmetric the offset vectors are different from the case above li Edit Beams Local System Offset Vector Hinges Split Points Move End Translate Buckling Factors Whole beam Specify offset vector C End Vector3d 0 m 0 m C End2 Vector3d 0 m 0 m m Align
71. inner side has been set to invisible one line is missing in this illustration if you compare it with the illustration earlier in this chapter We click in both the regions in the double bottom Because we had checked the checkbox Join Flat Regions this results in one continuous plate being made The join operation is always done with the previously created plate You can reset the stack by checking on off the Join Flat Regions check box Description Plate Mame 23 Create Flat Region on Plane In some cases you would like to use an arbitrary plane Point Vector 3 Points Determined by This is possible by clicking the Point Vector tab and Point 000 typing in the coordinates for a point and a normal vector Normal 12 3 By clicking on the Point button you can select a point in the graphics By clicking on the Normal button you can select a normal vector by clicking two points in the graphics Join Flat Regions Select Flat Regionis in 2D View Close DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 56 15 September 2011 Create Flat Region on Plane It is also possible to use an arbitrary plane by clicking on x e Je pomntivector Sont Determined by the 3 Points tab Paint 1 f 23 By typing in the coordinates of the points or selecting them Pom 456 in the graphical view a plane containing the three points is Point 3 Poio m0 m0
72. load M Fz2 58833 3 Total applied load M Conceptual load M 0 0 Fz2 58833 3 0 Fz2 58833 3 Display in Input Units v FEM Loadcase number 2 C Display in Database Units Load Case Properties LC_eqpm_skid The tab Equipment lists the equipments that are part of the loadcase and where they are placed Notice that the co ordinate values are relative to the local origin the snap point of the equipments Dnl skid Prism Equipment B 13 75 lll Load Case Properties LC eqpm skid General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition Detailed information about the line Load Generator Structure Description xcoord y coord fx Drill rig skid BM32 Applied Line Line Load pos1 24 55 8 5 loads may be found from the tab Drill rig skid BM32 Applied Line Line Load pos2 35 Drill_rig_skid BM32 Applied Line Line Load posi 17 5 Loads Remember to activate the radio Dril rig skid BM32 Applied Line Line Load pos2 185 Drill rig skid BM56 Applied Line Line Load pos1 8 5 66 99 Drill_tig_skid BM56 Applied Line Line Load pos2 button Applied Loads to see the Drill_tig_skid BM56 Applied Line Line Load pos1 Drill_tig_skid BM56 Applied Line Line Load pos2 loads Drill rig skid BM58 Applied Line Line Load pos1 Drill rig skid BM58 Applied Line Line Load pos2 Drill rig skid BM58 Applied Line Line Load post Drill rig skid BM58 Applied Line Line Load pos2
73. m Equipment Explicit Load Load Load Combination es Environment In the example below a punch is performed divide and trim The solid formed from the profile and the sweep length 15 shown in yellow all structural parts inside this solid are removed Remember that the start position can not be in the same plane as the plate to punch Profile Punch Cut New Profile Profile start position Point 5 m 5 m 1 m in Punc C Cut Sweep direction Sweep length o 01 5 m Profile local z fi 00 Close It is also possible to do punch operations on complex surfaces below is an example of such Different from above is that this operation will divide the plate and stiffeners if they are inside the solid the action type 15 set to Cut To see the cut lines or topology lines double click the plate You can now insert model curves and use these to divide the plate Profile Punch Cut Manhole New Profile Profile start position Point 5 m 5 m 0 igi unc Cut m Sweep direction Sweep length 0 D 1 5 Profile local 2 fi 10 Close 2 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 74 15 September 2011 3 3 1 14 Divide using planes You may also divide a plate and beams by using temporarily planes in x y z or general direction The option is available from select object s RMB an
74. m 0 m 5 5 m 50 Pa 3 Point 6 m 0 5 m 5 m 0 Pa Description Wet surface Footprint Pressure Name SLoad Load Intensities Linear varying PressureO x DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 117 15 September 2011 Java script load This option allows you to make your own function to describe the surface load A typical example may be static water pressure simulating for example an intact or damaged condition if you do not want to run a hydrostatic or hydrodynamic analysis where such loads are automatically generated In such cases the wetted surface to be loaded differs from case to case The below example shows how to create different load conditions based on one wet surface Please note that such computations may take time as it 1s necessary to evaluate the java script function at multiple positions It 1s required that you have knowledge on Javascript as you need to make your own function describing the surface load The model and the wet surface are shown to the right 8 mai2008 09 41 There are no emphases on defining the boundaries of pavers the wet surface to correspond to the actual water surface the wet surface has been defines simply as a footprint to use when making the load amp X Wet Surface B ws The load to be used in this example is as follows Function for generating a hydrostatic pressure on a wet surface for heeling about global x axis an
75. main Chapters and tick off for Sections within each Chapter The report generator is scripted which means that you can recreate the same report after e g a model update or new analysis The report FAI can be exported to Word Excel html or a text file In the example below the report will contain information about the structure and the masses The Chapter Structure is already selected while the Chapter Masses is being added L Report E X Define Report Mame jacket v Journal report generation Close Report Report Title E A Structure jacket ME Beam Coordinate Beam Property Beam Hydro Property Available Chapters Beam Eccentricity Structure Add Selected Beam Local System Properties ee Beam Hinge Masses Beam Segment Plate Coordinate Plate Property Support Boundary Cor Support Local System Support Stiffness Matri Support Rigid Link Override Number Format Joint Coordinate Number format Scientific Precision HEN Hj Save Report Report format wordtML File name jacket nee mum Frame Code Check Plate Code Check In case you want to remove any Chapters from a report you can Define Report select the Chapter RMB and Delete Chapter Name Name Point Mass Point Mass Local 5 Beam Mass and CI All loadcases Plate Mass and Ony Material Takeoff Be Maternal T akeott Analysis Load Summary Load Summary C
76. may be used for global or local models This user manual describes how to change meshing parameters to make different analysis representations FE models for the same concept model A concept model can also be used to make one or several super elements for use in super element analysis The principles behind these options are illustrated using a semi submersible as a case example A concept model of a semi submersible contains regular plates curved plates beams and stiffeners In addition there are attributes for load generation typically compartment content or explicit loads like pressure or line loads This concept model can be used as basis for panel model i e the model as used by HydroD for stability and wave load analysis in global and local finite element analyses as well as in detailed fatigue analysis Wave load analysis in HydroD allows for symmetric models To make a panel model of a sub set of the concept model there are features for creating analysis models of named sets only A panel model has normally a coarse mesh density hence the mesh settings are normally different from a structural analysis model The picture to the right shows a panel model which has been created by meshing of the submerged structure One mesh setting has been used in this case a characteristic value of 5 m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 10 15 September 2011 A global structural analysis is normally
77. now be multiplied with another transformation like e g scaling down to half size factor of 0 5 When selecting scaling as the post transformation action the dialogue box looks like Copy Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Transformation Rotate_UM Post Multiply Scale Translate Rotate Mirror Scaling factor Scale 3 Paint Position Move Paint Combine Multiply Caen Click Multiply to modify the transformation Rotate UM and the Apply to rotate and scale the initial segment in one operation The picture to the right shows the new segment in red colour The commands generated are shown below Rotate UM Rotate Point 0 0 0 Vector3d 0 0 1 120 Rotate UM scalei l 51 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 43 15 September 2011 3 2 13 Modify guiding geometry In general all objects can be modified after they have been created Typically this is done by selecting an object s from the graphic window or from the browser see previous Section Find select and display guiding geometry RMB and Properties Edit Join or Divide This Section gives some examples on how to do these operations The most commonly used operations are the Join and Divide Typically when building up complex curves to be used when creating structure or splitting structure or when dividing curves defined by importing data from othe
78. plates generated by skinning in between two curves at a time some of the plates are highlighted When skinning between all curves in one operation the curvature of the plate only one plate in this case becomes smoother see the picture to the right To see the difference in the two approaches a plate has been inserted and a divide operation has been performed see later how to do this As can be seen below there is a significant difference in the topology along at a constant elevation along the plates On the left hand side there is no continuation in the plates around the third guideline while the right hand side shows a continuation The reason for this is that skin curves between multiple curves will generate a continuous surface while skinning between two curves at a time will ensure continuation between the two curves only but not continuation between the other curves DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 52 15 September 2011 3 3 1 3 Insert using flat region Flat region constructs a flat plate on a user defined plane bounded by visible guiding curves beams or intersecting plates Tools Help Beam Support b Sweep Curves Dialog Joint gt B Flat Plate Mass E P Skin Loft Curves Compartment ed Flat Region Feature Edge A Interpolate Net of Curves Linear Slicer Sweep Curve Guiding Geometry b Profile Equipment gt Explicit Loa
79. rotation supports A support point is inserted from InsertlSupportlSupport Point Dialog or Support Point Alternatively you can also define a support point from the browser 8102000 mc sUu7Au 8 x shown to the right The input parameters are typically the Name spt Cancel position and type of boundary Position Poini12 m 5 499999999 m 0 m Am condition This example shows the program default which is fixed in all six degrees of freedom The M Let x change y and z Spring graphic symbol is shown Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness pin below SON 4 M Let r change ry and rz spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stittriess kM m qem kN m EM m EM m Boundary Condition Boundary Stiffness Matrix Boundary conditions Description Support Point Mame 5 1 The boundary conditions may be modified during Object Properties Support Local System input mode or by editing an Tm existing support condition select the support RMB Position Point 12 m 5 499999999 m 0 m and Properties In this case Spl Boundary Condition C Boundary Stiffness Matrix it is fixed in global y and z directions As can be seed Let change v and z Spring the graphic VIEW changes Fixed Free Prescribed D
80. the geometry in a model all the plates and all the edges When Genie imports a SAT file it tries to glue all parts in the SAT file together to one valid model If the points and edges in the SAT file are not placed with the required accuracy the import will fail Two points in the SAT file can not deviate with more than 1e 6 m The SAT file must always use m as unit if they are to be treated as the same point The ACIS SAT file is normally compatible with previous versions ACIS R19 Sp2 is used by Genie V5 Genie does support the ACIS SAT format for geometry exchange not IGES and others For conversion you may use 3rd party packages The following is supported e Geometry is supported but nothing else The following limitations apply Problems when importing from other systems with incompatible geometry such as e Solid models DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 9 7 The GENSOD file The stand alone application GENSOD generates the soil data needed by SPLICE storing them in GENSOD inp A GENSOD inp file can be imported into GeniE GeniE restores the information from the GENSOD inp file by reproducing the js commands thus supplying the folders Environment Location and Environment Soil of the GeniE browser with the relevant data GeniE User Manual Vol III 233 15 September 2011 Date modified No items match your search GENSOD input files inp Open as read only DET NORSKE
81. to these from the Section Library tab by using the same approach as explained in previous Chapter Create Edit Cross Section Section Library Channel Unsymmetrical General Section Cone Pipe Bar Box Section LSection x New section Allow edit Diameter m x Thickness m x Shear Factors Y 1 2 Z L Diameter Y Thickness Fabrication para method pras X L Section Channel Section Library Box Section Unsymmetrical General Section Cone Library Browse Subset SM Open Section Library on C Program Files DN 5 GeniE_D3509 xi Look in Co Libraries ex E3 aisc E y anglebar xml bulb xml 9 flatbar xml Material_library xml Ej NSF_EN KZY 9 thar xml File name Jaisc_v3 kzy Files of type Section library ML M Cancel 2 OK Cancel The theory used when computing the derived properties 15 listed GeniE s help page under Reference documents 3 1 3 Thickness properties Thickness properties can be defined from the command Edit lProperties Thickness or from RMB in the browser area There are no libraries or pre defined thicknesses in GeniE but it is easy to create your own library set by using the XML file approach as explained above or by defining and re using a journal file typically a My thickness s file Create Edit Thick
82. x Change the footprint template from complete bottom to a 4 corner footprint Cancel Define footprint m zs 11 Clear Selected M Clear current footprint definition Range of footprints in local coordinates Remove footprints 2 and 3 by selecting the footprints and click Clear Selected You may also remove one of the footprints and edit the coordinate values to define the new position Notice that all coordinates are local to the footprint Define footprint m m Use a rubber band to indicate the new footprint This will give LI Eine you an approximate position and size of the new footprint and it is necessary to edit the values In this case the values modified to X 1 0 4m X 2 0 4 m Y 1 1 5 m and Y 2 2 0 5 m Range of footprints in local coordinates lll Equipment Footprint lili Equipment Footprint x c ET 4 ES Cancel Cancel Define footprint Define footprint m ia LI Ej m LI Clear Selected Clear current footprint definition M Clear current footprint definition Range of footprints in local coordinates Range of footprints in local coordinates im 075 15 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 142 15 September 2011 4 5 3 Placing the equipment Prior to loading the structural model with equipments a loadcase m
83. you can do the same in addition you can specify that the local z axis shall always be aligned with a shell or plate In this example all the curved stiffeners are aligned with the plate so that the z coordinate is always perpendicular to the shell Shell 1 Ni Edit Beams X Local System Offset Vector Hinges Split Points Move End Translate Buckling Factors Local system interpretation C Guide local system Q Relative to plate C Surface normal Q m Force the local systems Z value to follow the C Explicit local system Qe normal of a plate Relative to plate Q m Applicable for Support Curves and Curved Beams Rotation C Rotate around local X axis deg C Flip local X preserving the Y vector C Flip local X preserving the Z vector Relative to plate Align local z axis o deg relative to the normal of Shell_1 OK Cancel Ep By using 0 degrees as shown above the stiffener local z axis will be aligned and in the same direction as the shell normal shell local z axis Typically using 180 degrees the stiffener local z axis will be in the opposite direction as the shell normal An example is shown to the right where the flange is now on the other side of the shell DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 87 15 September 2011 3 3 5 6 Flush stiffeners Stiffeners may be flushed automatically to plates and shells or you may specify a
84. 1 8 Define plates using beams as reference It is also possible to create plates and shells by referring to beams in stead of guide curves It works the same way as for curves One example is shown below illustrating the use of beams in a skin operation DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 70 15 September 2011 3 3 1 9 Divide using existing structure When using the top down modelling approach it will often be necessary to divide the structure The following example shows how to divide a plate it is similar for beams and stiffeners based on intersecting structure plates or stiffeners The divide function is available from select object s RMB and Divide This example has a plate PL intersected by 4 stiffeners Select the plate RMB and choose Divide Centre of Gravity Move Flip Normal Join Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Mesh Locking Named set View options Visible model By using the option Divide Plates first radio button and C Cu Using Exp lode all lates in Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts selection into simpler plates Divide Plates second radio button the Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates Divide plate using input curve plate P11 is divided into 9 new plates Divide plates with plane Z Point ector 3 Points Zecoor
85. 11 The run time parameters for a linear analysis can be modified from the activity monitor or the browser H Environment g Equipment 99 Properties FS Structure Activity Duration Status Generate Input M 95 1 LinStatic Analysis 45 SUCCESS i dada Description M 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 1s SUCCESS LC flare LoadCase M 1 1 1 Delete loads Os SUCCESS Ly Activities LC heli LoadCase 4 1 1 2 Generate Inads Os Success ker LC_mass LoadCase M 1 1 3 Delete mesh 1s SUCCESS LC total LoadCombination pA 1 1 4 Generate mesh 05 SUCCESS LinStatic step 1 Meshing REY 1 2 Linear Structural Analys 35 SUCCESS EEO ERI SEE v 1 3 Load Results m R LinStatic step 3 Loa racrkra inm The parameters are e Data check only This will check the data input and no analysis is carried out Analysis type e Automatic generation of files Input data O sumus to Sestra analysis is made by GeniE In WEE EE Number of Modes case you have deselected this option you Shift can make your own input file See below rem how to do this M warp Correction 4 node elements Cancel Apply e Warp correction The low order elements in SESTRA are flat Flat quadrilateral shell elements may be impossible to construct over doubly curved surfaces The condition of self equilibrium is not satisfied when the elements are not flat or warped Self
86. 1s black Sold Type fHeayBuk z Density 3000 Eg m 3 Kam 3 Shape function Compartment is full b j Width fraction bB 0 25 Angle of repose 20 deg dea Cancel Apply L Create Edit Content The third option 1s Ore In this case the compartment is assumed to be full In this case the top shape function is disregarded New CEdieising et Liquid Content Sold Content Compartment colour type is grey Solid Type Dre T Density Kiger 3 Shape function Width fraction 15 Angle of repose 22 5 deg deg DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 GeniE 134 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 The content types are applied to three compartments The compartment containing ore has a filling degree of 75 Observe that the top of the ore has a horizontal distribution since the shape function has been disabled 24 May 2008 13 36 UM_Comp 24 May 2008 13 38 UM_Comp Analysis_ Whole Comp_solid FEM Loadcase 7 When applying a solid content with a shape function to a regular compartment it is easier to understand how the loads are generated and how they are mapped to a finite element model 24 May 2008 13 50 In this case the finite element discretization 1s good enough to make a representative finite element load application If the finite element mesh is much coarser the loads may not be identical to the applied loads In such cases the t
87. 2 Profile local z 0 10 Close DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 79 15 September 2011 The mid ship part can now be created using the sweep curve also known as extrude functionality In this case the sweep curve uses a vector of 30m PSS x The selected curves are used in the EREN ese ae sweep operation Please notice that a some of the plates have been Sweep curves along 2 removed for visibility urve Vector 30m Om Om Cancel Apply The sweep curve operation will generate the structural part in the longitudinal direction If you want to use the same web frame at different positions you can do so by a copy operation For this purpose it is beneficial to make a named set for the entire web frame you can then refer to the web frame at a later stage o x Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation The frame spacing 1s 2 5m Plates are removed for 7 visibility Copy time s Preview Cancel If you need to make some of the web frames watertight 1 e no cut outs you can add plates by using e g cover curve or skin functionality The plates may be joined at the end Typically the highlighted curve to the right is used in a cover curve operation The vertical guide curves are used in a skin operation to fill the man hole Observe that GeniE will detect if ther
88. 2 534113e 004 Default presentation 2281039e 004 2 027966e 004 pipa C Use this presentation as default 1 521819e 004 7 1 2687456 004 C default presentation B Y 1 015672e 004 k 7 625985e 003 change X 5 09525 1e 003 2 5645 16e 003 3 3781 75e 001 Cancel Apply DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 222 15 September 2011 Beam forces can be viewed in a 3D and 2D view The 2D view is also used to look at beam stresses In the first case the entire structure or parts ieee m mass of it is used In this example one relevant row is selected and beam moments are shown Attribute Component Surface Bear Forces Mss Top Present as 02 Jun 2008 14 03 UM Results Analysis 1 LC mass Force kN Length m FEM Loadcase 3 Beam Forces Mxy Min 34 6446 C ect Settings Max 36 3412 vector plot q Contour plot Settings C Numeric annotation Settings Beam diagram Settings Additional presentation Deformed shape settings P stress vectors 1 L Global min max Default presentation C Use this presentation as default C No default presentation No change ceca a To use the 2D view select a beam or beams and activate L Beam Force and Stresses Display the functionality fr om Sort selected beams segments into continuous beam lines Go Tools Analysis Sort selected bea
89. 23 0 012 m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 75 15 September 2011 3 3 1 15 Join plates If you want to join plates to a larger plate you can do this by selecting the plates RMB and Join It is required that the plates are aligned i e the tangential direction is constant for all plates in the connection area The example below shows flat plates but it works the same for curved surfaces Option 1 Join plates with same thickness only Select all plates RMB and Join Use option Join only aligned plates and shells with compatible thickness material As can be seen plate 15 not joined with the rest since it has another thickness L amp Join Join Beams and Segments Join Plates Join Guide Curves Join Plates and Shells C Join aligned plates and shells c Join only aligned plates and shells with compatible thickness material Automatically simplify joined plates T Th04 T Zz Th05 Z Option 2 Join all plates Repeat the process above but use Join aligned plates and shells All plates are now joined You should check which thickness is applied to the joined plate l Join Join Beams and Segments Join Plates Join Guide Curves Join Plates and Shells C Join only aligned plates and shells with compatible thickness material Automatically simplify joined plates Z Option 3 Join all plates but do not a
90. 24367 m 0 5 m Global System Specify local coordinate system Local vector vector3ai0 61 23 2435 m0 5 esr 24st Vector3dL 0 3535533906 m0 2660254030 m 0 Local vector Vector3a 0 7071 067812 m0 m0 07106761 2 Local System Local sstemiectorsait 61 m 0 5 m Global System Specify local coordinate system C Local X vector Vector3d 0 6123724357 m5 m 0 61237243 Local vector Vector3dE0 3535533806 8660254038 m 0 Veotor3al0 7071067812 m 0 m D 7071067812 Local stem LocalSystemivector3d 0 6123724357 m 0 5 m Global System If you click Global System the local coordinate system will be re aligned with the global system DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 165 15 September 2011 5 6 Rigid link support A rigid link support is a connection between an independent point also known as master node and dependent points also called slave nodes The connection can contain various degrees of dependencies typically all dependent nodes shall inherit both translation and rotation of the master node or only the translations Rigid link supports are often used to ensure a correct transition between a beam and shell model or at the ends of a cargo hold model The picture to the right shows a rigid link support between a beam end and the edges of the incoming plates The rigid support link will ensure that the vertical plane th
91. 25 U Object Properties Load Interface Point Load M LC Point load FEM Loadcase 1 E Name PLoad5 pi 10125 Forces and Moments 4 Local coordinate system Fx 500 Mx 2000 N m Fy DN N My 0 N m Nm Fz 1000 N N Mz ON m N m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 98 The point load can be documented in several ways e Graphic as shown on previous page e From a report generated by Genik see the Section Pictures and reports for further details e Select the loadcase RMB and Properties The explicit loads can also be documented from the folder tab Loads The example below shows both options for the point load applied in load case LC_Point_Load Load Case Properties LC_Point_load General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition iption PLoad5 Point Force and Moment pos v From Equipments Display Unit Notations v From Explicit Loads Explicit Loads Applied Loads 4 2 2 Point loads on plates GeniE User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Load Case Properties LC_Point_load General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition Environment Acceleration field Structural Analysis Load and Mass management Delete Explicit Loads Generate Applied Loads Represent Equipment as loads C Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass F Include structure self weight in stru
92. 3 15 September 2011 3 2 4 Guide Spline Guide splines are inserted by referencing existing snap points The command is activated ciel amp KIM from InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Spline or from the tool button as shown to the 8 right The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each guide spline emm you create the default name is Curve LJ Poly Curve Guide Arc Elliptic Beam 40 Guide Circle Plate pq Model Curve Joint Poly Curve Dialog Mass Guide Line Dialog Compartment m Filet Curves Dialog Guide Point Dialog Feature Edge Linear Slicer RH Guide Plane The guide spline is now computed based number of positions Cabs Ds you add There may be several positions and you stop the input sequence by a double click Poly Curve Guiding Geometry Explicit Load CRD re En In the example below the guide spline is defined from 4 snap Load Case 40 Guide Circle doo NM La dd Cres points 1 e click four times and a double click on the last Environment 1 Billet Curves position When you want to use more than 4 points the mouse indicator will ede looklike 3 2 5 Poly curve Guide splines are inserted by referencing existing snap points The command is activated J amp K from InsertlGuiding Geometry Poly Curve or from the tool button as shown to the POSUI right
93. 395E 3Z O9141E 16 27916E 15 O0000E 00 54747 13 38395E 3Z 77903E 02 81639E 17 O0000E 00 76676E 17 OO000E 00 09141 16 81639E 17 77903 E 02 54747 13 54747 13 25149E 15 27916E 15 O0000E 00 54747 13 63107 04 73933 03 92664 02 Estimated size of stiffness matrix for superelement INPUT ERROR Loads are not given 2 O0000E 00 766 76E 17 4 73933E 03 39033 04 458372E 02 S4747E 13 54747 13 00000 00 25149E 15 92664 02 483 72E 02 75588 04 5268589 variables Estimate of total size of stiffness matrices for new superelements Error occurred during data preparation Since an error is found the run is terminated 5268589 variables For Help press F1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 215 15 September 2011 When the analysis is successful results can be viewed Activity Duration Status Generate Input ee m 5 M 1 UserManual Analysis 4s Success from the VIEW Results All Or Results with Mesh MAS 1 1 Always Regen 1s Success M 1 1 1 Delete loads Os Success M 1 1 2 Generate loads Os Success M 1 1 3 Delete mesh 1s Success M 1 1 4 Generate mesh Os Success If you have not specified default result view you need to MER 1 2 Linear Structural Analys 3s Success Yes MR 1 3 Load Results Os Success
94. 5 298X149 300X150 294X200 298X201 294X302 298X299 300X300 300X305 304X301 310X305 310X310 346X174 350X175 354X176 336X249 340X250 344X348 344X354 350X350 350X357 396X199 400X200 404X201 386X299 390X300 388X402 394X398 394X405 400X400 400X408 406X403 414X405 428X407 458X417 498X432 446X199 450X200 434X299 440X300 496X199 500X200 506X201 482X300 488X300 596X199 600X200 606X201 612X202 582X300 588X300 594X302 692X300 700X300 708X302 792X300 800X300 808X302 890X299 900X300 912X302 918X303 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 231 15 September 2011 4 Improved support of cross sections PRI Enhanced conversion defining a Bar section GBARM card including stiffness properties Previously a General section was defined ANG Enhanced conversion correct calculation of product of inertia about Y and Z axes TEE Support of T section It is converted to an I section with bottom flange width equal to web thickness 5 Model size limitations For GeniE V6 00 64 bit version the max number of nodes and elements 1s 25000 while the limit 1s 10500 for the 32 bit version For both 32 and 64 bit versions the number of load combinations that can be handled is 1000 and number of basic loadcases per load combination 15 100 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 232 15 September 2011 9 6 The ACIS SAT file The SAT file contains all
95. 95 denmpDerature TOQdS esses un aa Dinde ne nee a EM 106 220 Piesenbed S DE a UE E E ETE 107 4 3 SUBIT AS MTM TTE 108 do dai A vo cott Daas ESO PLU 108 4 3 1 1 109 4 3 1 2 RERO RIP 111 4 3 1 3 COPO ERR 112 4 3 1 4 yana Ver MH PEE ao RR REED A 113 4 52 rec 114 1925 Define 114 4 3 3 1 Pressure OUS na E SPERO ha iln 115 4 3 3 2 alle nr Neal deu lun a 119 4 3 3 3 COMPONENTEN ODES sat Da dex GALLE OMOEA ES 120 4 3 3 4 Taner hydro pressure OIG to FIV roD ore are a teta 121 4 4 COMPARTMENT EOADS eese brio 123 124 4 4 1 1 ie 124 4 4 1 2 MOD CLEC a ata ta eh toad sens Wd CN ET PER WEN 126 4 4 1 3 Open compartments and non structural plates sise 127 4 4 1 4 ROO sers petet mo va tratos pea vat 128 4 4 1 5 COFFOSTON QAO sd nie tn de tn Atta ueri HRS ER D one rate die eue 129 4 4
96. As mentioned in the previous Section it is possible to add either a mesh density or a specific number of elements to a feature edge In the following there is no local mesh setting applied to the feature edges in question hence the global settings apply for the new feature edges 06 May 2008 23 36 06 May 2008 23 38 UM Mesh9 UM Mesh9 Feature edges Fedge3 amp Fedge4 inserted The feature edges defines topology edges DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 197 15 September 2011 6 3 3 Mesh options for face or edge The global mesh parameters defined from EditlRulesIMeshing may be replaced by local mesh parameters applied to specific parts of the model surfaces beams boundary curves and feature edges A local mesh parameter is defined from EditlProperties Mesh Option or from the browser Please notice that local mesh options have no effect when the Advancing Front Mesher is selected global or local setting UM Mesh3 Name Description Create Edit mesh option nalysis Force quadratic elements Mesh Options for Edge Mesh Options for Face Force use af quadrilaterals no triangles If vau do not setthis to true or false the AFM meshing rule default is used Capacity Mesh Options Environment Mew Mesh e E P quipment Color code alkyisible properties roperties Fields Beam Types Save HTML Report
97. D MASSES nan eese ngu v ue vd eoo e E EN bud e reseed 155 5 APPLY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS een eiu eva eU Rea Fo DV C n EP SEED E EY Y GER eR TUE DU NE VES ne de est 159 5 1 FIXATION AND ROTATION SUPPORTS te oto toma reto eu ed ode itn e ree bue t ev e t on nr ee cea betur eR did OR 160 2 2 GROUND SPRINGS P 162 5 3 BOUNDARY STIPENESS MAT RIK oed ee vx Ue roe o eem E e Aa e bu e aeu B e ve edv rebut usta Re 162 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 3 15 September 2011 5 4 CREATE ATs OPER BREMEN D a EEE 163 5 5 TOC AE CO ORDIN A EE titrate duit On 163 5 6 RIG MD SUPPOR TO 165 DO Red bod DNAN OUT 166 BPO denned 0 168 6 MAKE AND CONTROL THE FINITE ELEMENT MESH 0 ccsccccccssssccccssssccccccsscccccccsssscccccssccccesees 169 6 1 ND VN 169 Oll sKehnemesbyduserinp osse eet e ene EGER 170 O2 Renueqnesh DY AUS CLUS Ode tu dui 170 Od Refine mesh by danser ng eatre CA es A RE 171 OALA LADE P 171 6 1 5 Documenting the finite element mesh ot oae Ta S tuit sd
98. Drill rig skid BM2 Applied Line Line Load post Drill_tig_skid BM2 Applied Line Line Load pos2 Drill rig skid BM2 Applied Line Line Load pos1 Drill_tig_skid BM2 Applied Line Line Load pos2 From Equipments Display Unit Notations From Explicit Loads Explicit Loads Cancel Load Generator Structure Description ng skid Applied Line Line Load post Drill skid Applied Line Line Load pos Drill ng skid Applied Line Line Load post skid Applied Line Line Load pos 4133 12 You can also document the equipments and the loads from the FilelSave report DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 148 15 September 2011 4 6 Masses and inertia loads The three sources of masses structural mass point mass and equipment mass that can contribute to the inertia loads Structural mass and point mass is the same for all loadcases if added to a loadcase 4 6 1 Structural mass The structural mass is a result of material Structural Analysis Load and Mass management density and volume of the structure GeniE Delete Explicit Loads Generate Applied Loads will compute the mass and the centre of gravity To include the mass in a loadcase mass x gravity of a finite element model you need to activate this in the load case property You can check
99. E 1 2 Linear Structural Analys MB 1 3 Load Results Duration Os Os Os Os Os Os Os Os Duration Os Os Os Os Os Os Os Duration Os Os Os Os Os Os Os Os User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Status Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Status Mat Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mok Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Status Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Hot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mok Started Cancel Generate Input Cancel Generate Input Cancel Generate Input User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 GeniE 214 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 Analysis activities for eigenvalue analysis T Activity Monitor are created as follows Available activities Meshing C Static Journal activity executions M Linear Structural Analysis Eigenvalue Pile Sail Analysis Load Results status Generate Input Mat Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Hot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Activity M 1 UserManual Analysis 65 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 4 1 1 1 Delete loads M 1 1 2 Generate loads M 1 1 3 Delete mesh M 1 1 4 Generate mesh M 1 2 Linear Structural Analys 1 3 Laad Results
100. E GUIDING GEOMETRY en dna sats ducat 20 DP MEE S oro 20 21 M SCI TING ica 22 DP MEC A C nee dede dite idee een ele 23 SO DO A corn 23 DLO CLIC 29 RPM ec nat 25 DS MOU CHI VO cele dice treet cat etek aca X eat aaa aed 26 bw Lr Mem 27 3 2 10 Model guiding geometry using existing snap features ss 29 3 2 11 Fand seleet and display guidunp peomieltry i eec A aes tese edet t E Ded a E E RETE 30 3 2 12 Delete Move and copy guiding geometry seriinin 33 2219 Modi 43 3 2 14 HOD DONS deck lira tend AERE Loss 47 3 3 CREATE A STRUCI URE CONCEPT MODELS beo ete dete Pareto nivei nee ease 48 ER LL 46 3 3 1 1 uno tw Ea We 49 3 3 1 2 SOFIA A 50 3 3 1 3 ETAT USM der dede
101. ENE 0 A42 91e010 232044e011 0 OPO 1800 teQ08 db 1581676 1591620 L oadCombi Total Conceptual i T D C Some examples of the content the Load summary conceptual Lc 0 00 93008 Lc 2 Total Conceptual 0 ofen E eee O 1 G3 3 Total Conceptual 0 amp 0X0 HN rexDo 4 Total Conceptual 0 o 060 133p 0 Total Conceptual 2000 0 16 2110 06 29077 108XD 76 Some examples of the content the Load summary FEM difference difference between FEM forces and FEM reaction forces 210321e012 228740 O 0 O Z4MeOU c Taal FEM Diference 880 5911722012 0 O __0 1038796000 ics 3 TaalFEMDiference Me 0 LOK FEM Diference 15060 10e LE Toia FEM 2122791010230 0 0 0 0 180 9 0 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 157 15 September 2011 To document the masses the procedure is the same as for loads FilelSave Report Select Masses and click x Add Selected to include Define Report load reporting into the Name UM_Mass_Feportl IV Journal report generation report ME Report Report Title UM Mass Report The next step is to include the relevant parts Available Chapters to document Add Selected Report E M Masses Frame Code Check Set C
102. FEM BC Visible The support curve will ensure that boundary conditions are added to each finite element node along the curve This means that you can easily change the mesh density without altering the boundary conditions Typical views of boundary conditions applied to a finite element model are shown below Fixed in translation DOF Free in rotation DOF Fixed in global y and z directions all other fixed Mesh density 0 15m Mesh density 0 10m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 162 15 September 2011 5 2 Ground springs A ground spring may have spring characteristics in one or several degrees of freedom The example below shows a ground spring with spring stiffness in x and y directions All other directions are fixed Support xi Name Sp10 7 _ Cancel Position Point 18 m 5 499999999 m 4 m Boundary Condition Boundary Stiffness Matrix Boundary conditions v Lety change y and Spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness 100 kNm m kN m M Let r change ry and rz spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stifness Ko qe M EM m EM m i waAAwMww M w M YM MMaua wi EM m 5 3 Boundary stiffness matrix It is also possible to define a Support a xj ground spring with additional Nme
103. I Version 6 0 203 15 September 2011 The mesh can be improved by inserting additional mesh transition zones in this case one zone 08 May 200 UM Mesh1 lt Regular plates Inner 0 25m mid 05m Outer 1 0m Sesam Quad Mesher and Program default settings 08 May 2004 08 May 2008 UM Mesh1 UM Mesh1 Advancing Front Mesher Advancing Front Mesher amp number of elements along circles Inner 32 Outer 46 As can be seen the mesh created by the Sesam Quad Mesher improves significantly by inserting an extra mesh transition zone This also applies to the Advancing Front Mesher but this may not be so necessary to do since the mesh has a good initial quality DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 204 15 September 2011 6 5 Prioritized meshing When GeniE is making a mesh it randomly picks the starting mesh position and the meshing sequence However when the structure is not modified the mesh will be the same every time a mesh is made It is possible to specify the mesh sequence to control the meshing sequence Typical examples where this technique can be used is when you want the best mesh to be created for critical parts To do this you need to add mesh rules to the analysis activity To make an analysis activity is described in the next Section The effect of prioritized meshing is ee e 1139 _Mes shown using the example to the Analysis right There are four p
104. Integraph PDS sdnf CadCentre PDMS sdnf GeniE Journal file JS file Create a clean Journal file without historical data See below for more information Rule Loads XML file Export necessary data to Nauticus Hull to generate loads and boundary ACIS SAT file Export surface data that can be accessed by other programs supporting the format The purpose of export amp import of the command file the xml concept model file and the FEM file is described in the following for more details on the other formats please consult User Manual Vol I DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 224 15 September 2011 This Chapter focuses primarily data storage of data produced by GeniE It is important to know the limitations in the journalling system and the xml neutral file to ensure re use of data for new projects and when upgrading to newer versions of GeniE 9 1 The command file generated by GeniE x manipulations and picture generation are automatically logged For some operations __ ts like running analysis export finite element data and report generation you need to iF Status Banaras SLL specify that you want to log the operation M 2 1 Analysis Analysis Running An example of such is shown to the right aS Hs AE MA 12 Linear Structural Analysis Hot Started MR 1 3 Load Results Not Started When importing the command file to a new workspace the same model will be recreated If yo
105. NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 17 15 September 2011 3 PLATE amp SHELL STRUCTURES The following Chapters describe how to do the various tasks to model and analyse a plate shell structure using a design load based analysis approach This means that the loads are assumed to be applied and computed in GeniE as opposite to a direct analysis approach where some of the governing loads are defined by the hydrodynamic module HydroD The content of this Section have been organized so that they follow a typical working procedure e Set up the design premise by defining the section profiles materials and plate thicknesses e Create guiding geometry for use when making plates and stiffeners Notice that importing data from other sources to generate guiding geometry is dealt with at the end of Chapter 3 The Section describing guiding geometry also documents operations common for modelling of other objects typically graphic handling e Make plate shell structure including stiffeners by referencing guiding geometry It is also possible to re use data from other sources to directly create the structure e Apply the loads to the model these may be manually defined or computed from compartment filling e Define the boundary conditions e Make and control the finite element mesh e Run analysis and look at results 3 1 The design premise Prior to modelling you may define which plate thicknesses section profiles and ma
106. ORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 169 15 September 2011 6 MAKE AND CONTROL THE FINITE ELEMENT MESH Prior to making a finite element model you should ensure that the model passes the geometry check from Tools StructurelVerify The finite element mesh depends on the settings you specify as well as the topology the edges and the vertices of the model see Sections 3 3 6 and 3 3 7 for more details A finite element mesh is created from Activity Monitor ALT M ToolslAnalysislCreate Mesh or from rs ToolslAnalysislActivity Monitor ALT D by deselecting the activities not needed Journal activity executions For an explanation of the different meshing steps Delete loads Generate loads Delete Ee 9 1 Analysist Analysis s Not Started 15 1 1 Meshing Always Regen Os Mot Started mesh Generate mesh see volume 1 chapter ose 3 13 2 M 1 1 2 Generate loads Os Mot Started A 1 1 3 Delete mesh Os Mot Started M 1 1 4 Generate mesh Os Mot Started Activity _ Duration Status Generate Input The following priorities are used when creating the finite element mesh 1 2 Linear Structural Analys Os Mot Started 1 3 Load Results 05 Mot Started 1 Number of elements along a line beam or feature edge 2 Mesh density applied to a line beam or feature edge and a plate 3 Global settings s
107. The rest of the plates are part of the second meshing priority Notice that any plates or beams not part of a meshing priority level will be meshed at the end M ame esh sequence ar 1 M Priority 2 Move Down Add Selection Cancel 19 May 2008 09 32 UM Mesh14 Analysis 1 L amp Create Mesh Priority Set M ame esh sequence Add Mesh Prioi Move Up Move Down Add eee a El Priority 1 Cancel GeniE 206 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 Mesh priorities are included in the meshing from the browser or the activity monitor see the following Section for details on analysis folder and activity monitor 51 68 UM_Mesh14 5 68 Analysis 5 08 Activities o Analysis1 step 1 Meshing Analysisl step 2 Linear Str R Analysisl step 3 Load Results Edit Mesh Activity E A Analysis Analysis ste KE Analysisl ste R Analysisl ste Load Cases User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 t Activity Monitor gt Loading results cancel Journal activity executions Status Success Activity Duration M 1 Analysis1 Analysis 11s Bs 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 25 M 1 1 1 Delete loads 1 1 2 Generate loads 1 1 3 Delete mesh Generate Input ks Edit activity Success Success Success Success Success M M M 1 1 4 Generate mesh M 1 2 Linear Structural Analys MR 1 3 Load Results The pictures b
108. VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 234 15 September 2011 10 PICTURES AND REPORTS Pictures can be exported to a number of formats From FilelSave Graphics as you can export a picture of what you see in the graphical part of the user interface to the formats as shown to the right You can also increase the resolution of the pictures by increasing the width and the height of the pixels In the example below the width is multiplied with a factor of three Since the aspect ratio is locked the pixel number for height is automatically adjusted Graphical size _x Graphical size Size Size f19 70666667 cm ml Height IE cm m Wah 53 12 cm m Height 54 m Scale Scale Width 100 Height 100 Width Height 200 Pixels Pixels Width 733 Height 75 Width EE Height 2025 M Lock aspect ratio Proportional fonts Cancel M Lock aspectratia v Proportional fonts Cancel The respective pictures generated are shown below As can be seen the picture to the right has a better resolution since number of pixels has been increased FEM Loadcase 21 EU FEM Loadcase 21 Some of the picture generation can be automated by editing a command file Please see Chapter 5 of the User Manual Volume I on how to do this DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 235 15 September 2011 Reports can be made from FilelSave Report make a report you add
109. WARE GeniE Version 6 0 83 A sphere or parts of it can be made using both the sweep curve and cover curve option As for the cone it is also possible to do a cover operation to make a sphere but the sphere shell 1s then not lying in the true sphere surface The quadrant to the right has been made using sweep curves referencing curves Curve2 and Curvel l Sweep Curves Curves to sweep from selection Curve Sweep curves along Curve Curvet C Vector Cancel Apply The complete sphere to the right has been created by copying the above quart part The sphere has been divided using a temporarily snap plane at elevations z 3m and z 2m in order to add a variation in shell thicknesses User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Ship bulbs may have different forms They can be described by a set of offset curves in this case you can do skinning between such curves or a quarter part of 1t can be described using three curves The quarter part of the bulb to the far right has been created using a cover operation of curves Curve4 Curve5 and Curve6 The complete bulb has been created by copying mirror or rotate the quarter part DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 84 15 September 2011 3 3 5 Add stiffeners to plates and shells Straight or curved beams and stiffeners may be inserted in the following ways 3 3 5 1 Straight beams between snap p
110. alysis Notice that you need to fill in all values as there are no default values Ld Hew material Pa Yield E Density 3 gt Pa x The yield value is used when code checking beams Young In case you want to create a model in GeniE for later use in Usfos you can define the tensile values as well For linear structural analysis this value is not used Poisson Themd de gt D amping amp x Tensile Fa cad too The isotropic shear material is used when you want to differentiate between the axial and shear part of the material You can reduce the axial components by defining an Axial reduction factor t Create Edit Material Properties x Mew material AwaMeductionge FKam x PP x x dE X Ms X cared to Axial Reduction T shear Density m Axial reduction e g 100 means 17100 axial stiffness Young Typically this material type is used on a plate part of a wall where the vertical axial forces are supposed to be carried by the columns Poisson Thermal Damping j UM Analysis a Capacity Environment Equipment You can also import a material library from c Program Files DNVS GeniE Libraries Material_library xml The path name assumes you have installed the program using the default installation set up The library is imported by Material lin
111. amic or eigen value analysis both the structural mass and point masses are part of the mass matrix per default El UM Comp Description Mass Kal X m Y m Z m Point masses are inserted from 8 3 Anabsi di Insert Mass or from browser as shown 3 Massl 1 Point Mass Scalar E Compartments Mass 1 1 Point Mass Scalar Eu Environment Mass 2 Mass Scalar La Equipment Properties Mew Point Mass a Structure Fields Save HTML Report qo E E H Utilities There are two options for point masses The 1 Create Point Mass Uniform Point Mass has same mass contribution in Uniform Paint Mass Generic Point Mass global x y and z directions Name UM Mass Uni Position Point 1O 57886792 r Mass 5000 Cancel Apply The other option is to define a Generic Point Mass There are several options and in this case a directional and diagonal mass Name Mass Dia matrix has been defined L Create Point Mass Uniform Point Mass Generic Point Mass Uniform Mass Diagonal Mass Matrix Position Point 10 57886782 Directional Mass Symmetric Mass Matris Local System E ERE RE ee The point masses are documented in a report as well as from the z Jokg j4000kg Kg 0 Kem graphical view Description X Coq Y Cog 2 Cog Ixz IY IYz 122 m m m Kg m 2 Kg m 2 Kg m 2 Kg m 2
112. amples are given In the example to the right the highlighted lines are edges to describe two of the boundaries of the plate The common point between the edges is called the vertex The plate shown has thus 4 edges and 4 vertices as minimum but may have more Similarly for a straight and regular beam the edge 1s used to describe the beam and there are thus two vertices A segmented beam has one or more edge per segment and corresponding number of vertices The example to the right shows a plate that has been made up of straight and curved lines The highlighted part shows the edge describing the curved boundary of the plate and it is connected to the straight lines with two vertices at its end This plate has 7 edges and 7 vertices The shell as shown below has been created by a cover operation between two identical complex curves built up by spline and straight parts When using cover skinning or curve net interpolation the shell will consist of different geometric primitives flat and curved parts The geometric primitives are connected by internal edges as shown to the right One internal edge and two edges are highlighted This shell has thus 16 edges in total 4 internal edges and 12 vertices 6 on each side L Poly Curve p Fit Curve To View 1 Curvell d i Curve definition OK Auto Curve Type Cancel Label curve points Curve Type Straight Spline Straig
113. apter Error Reference Ignore beam eccentricities Ww source not found E 16 co centic beams Wwe Beam and stiffener eccentricities in a finite element analysis are neglected by ticking off the option Ignore Eccentricities In other words the concept model may have eccentricities but they are disregarded when making the finite element model Ignore beam eccentricities should be checked when doing CSR bulk code check Finite element beams including eccentricities The eccentricities are disregarded Use co centric beams should be checked when doing CSR Tank code check In this case an eccentric beam or stiffener will be converted to a general beam Note that the beam must have an effective flange property for the option to have effect 28 Mar 2011 15 18 UM Mesh5 Analysis 1 Finite element beams with effective flange property and Use co centric beams checked DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 189 15 September 2011 6 2 1 12 Idealisations Idealisations Remove intemal vertices Ge Remove intemal edges Ge When the Remove internal vertices option is checked default points not required to represent the model are eliminated This option can be used to get better mesh around holes with buckling stiffeners Edges not required to represent the model may be eliminated by checking the Remove internal edges check box This option can be used to reduce the number of patches o
114. as Ey Equipment 0E Weight Lists DEEE ed Ha Properties Fields Fig Structure Save HTML Report m Utilities 4 5 2 Editing the COG and the footprint The COG is per default in the middle of the Properties equipment To change the COG select the Object Properties Section Material Equipment Load Interface Local System equipment RMB Properties and type in the new position of the COG Note that this position is relative to the local coordinate system origin in the middle of the bottom plane and local z axis Mame Generator upwards Note that the COG may be outside the We Ber equipment box This origin at the bottom acts as a snap point when equipment is placed on ee Structure Specify Footprint COG offset from footprint center Vectorsan m 1 m 4 m In this case the COG is moved towards a corner Linear varying loads and upwards DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 141 15 September 2011 The footprint or load distribution area is per default the same as the bottom area defined by the length and the width of the equipment To change the footprint select the equipment RMB and click Specify Footprint There are 4 predefined footprint layouts all of these may be edited and changed to meet the requirements The example below shows how to change a 4 corner footprint may be changed to a 3 point footprint Note that the footprint must be defined by an area
115. as large finite elements as possible and create first order elements The quality of the finite element results depends on the quality of the finite element mesh There are basically two ways of controlling the mesh quality e By using the control mechanisms built into GeniE In this case you specify the relevant check parameters if you want to over ride the default settings e By using your own experience or from calibration studies Experienced engineers know how to set the mesh initially and also to adjust based on the results typically by evaluating stress gradients after a finite element analysis In cases where limited experience 1s available calibration studies should be carried out to decide the initial mesh settings There are no default mesh settings that will guarantee the most correct or optimal analysis results This is because the analysis results depend on both the structure configuration as well as the complexity of the loads Therefore it is important that the user has sufficient control over the mesh generated and also means to adjust it so that the mesh 1s fit for purpose A small example of a tubular joint is used to exemplify how the mesh can be controlled and the significance of changing it The tubular joint has three incoming braces and the load case considered is a gravity load case Four different finite element models are analysed the results are presented on the next page Notice this example is meant as an examp
116. ased on XML files DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 138 15 September 2011 4 4 4 Direct analysis transfer compartment data to HydroD HydroD can re use compartment information to set up its internal volumes tanks or compartments that can be used in hydrostatic stability and hydrodynamic analyses including ballasting to define additional mass as well as to receive accelerations and pressures from wave load analysis HydroD requires that the first loadcase defines the outer wetted T Insert Load Case surface while the following loadcases are used to define the Name compartments Note that the compartments are defined in the v Dummy Hydro Pressure model referred to as the structural model in HydroD Wet Surface The example to the right shows how to define the first load case used to define the wetted surface see also previous chapters Bhs oe k while the remaining loadcases are used to define compartments for use in HydroD To add a compartment with so called dummy hydro pressure for use in HydroD e Define a load case e Select a compartment RMB and select Compartment Loads e Use intensity Dummy Hydro Pressure e Make a load case per compartment that shall be part of HydroD analysis The same barge as in previous sections is used to show how compartments can be used to define the dummy hydro pressure much quicker than a manual approach where the dummy hydro pressure is appl
117. ass Matrix Properties In this case the named set Point Mass Local Syst e gt Beam Mass and COG UM set Plate Mass and COG Material Takeoff Bearr Material T akeaff Plate About Mass Kg X Cog m Y Cog m Z Cog m XX Kg m 2 Kg m 2 IZZ Kg m 2 Frame Code Check Plate Code Check 2 12679e 007 1 7516 015 2 33661e016 10 1314 2 08586 010 1 8813e 010 2 61051e 010 21473 241776e 017 0 48 0207 5 18984e 007 5 28953e 007 2 7973e 006 1604 52 0 0 7 320843e 007 1 31401 008 1473464008 4 49576 006 1 196e 015 2 57184e 015 29 5067 4 98969e 009 5 03153 009 2 63078e 009 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 149 15 September 2011 It is also possible to apply a rotational filed in stead of a constant acceleration e g gravity You should remember to specify the constant acceleration to zero for all its components if you have a pure acceleration field Rotation axis vector Load Case Properties LC2 General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition Apply a rotation field in this loadcase Rotation Axis Point on rotation axis P1 angle The rotation field can either be a circular motion or a harmonic motion Circular rotational motion Select the loadcase RMB Properties and Angular velocity radians time uri jak aaae rad s deg x 2 Rotation Field to access the rotation f
118. at Plate Skin Loft Curves Compartment 5 am P Interpolate Net of Curves Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry d Profile Equipment Explicit Load Load Case Load Combination Environment b When using the curve net interpolation you need to select click on which curves form the two groups You must first select all curves in one direction group one Stop the input for this direction by double click the last curve Then select curves in the other direction group two Double click the last curve to complete the command Please note that when selecting the curves for the group they must be given successively 1 e in the order they are located Typically the curve net of three N 3 and five M 5 curves will look like the following figure User Manual Vol III GeniE 66 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 15 September 2011 When moving the mouse over the curve it becomes orange for the curves of the first group and green for the curves of the second group A selected curve stays orange green and is denoted by the sequence number SRE ENG ND oy EEE Coot bo 1 7 ARS ue NE E 7 ATHA SEMEN HH HH DESEE AE A er el DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 67 15 September 2011 The above picture shows that three curves have been added in one direction and one in the other direction a second is due to
119. ate edges The direction of the pressure load 1s relative to the footprint surface normal The right hand rule applies 01 May 2008 02 18 um PL_Pressure FEM Loadcase 4 X Description Surface Pressure Mame SLoa Load Intensities Constant Pressure 1000 Pa DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 Linear varying pressure Name SLoad3 Define at least 3 corner points 1 Point O m0 m 5 m Point 10 0 m 5 m Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m Point O m 10 m 5 Footprints Surface Normal Vectoradto m0 m1 m Linear Pressure Function Create a pressure function described by the equation kl k2 yek3 z4k4 00 Pam mo Pam 0 Pa m Pa m 1000 Pa The linear varying load includes a constant part and can vary as a function of global x y and z coordinates Three point varying pressure Object Properties Load Interface Modify Surface Load Name SLoad4 Define at least 3 corner points 1 Point O m 0 m 5 Point 10 m 0 m 5 m Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m Point O m 10 5 m Footprints Surface Normal Vectoradio m 0 m 1 m 3 Point Varying Pressure Point 1 Point Q m 0 m 5 m 2 Point 10 m 0 m 5 3 Point 7 433899752 m 10 Pressure 1 1000 Pa Pa 2 2000Pa Pa 3 3000 Pa Pa Intensities A three point varying load is determined from the load intensities at three defined points GeniE 110 15 S
120. be selected The illustrations below show the plate as a result of the curve net interpolation when all three and five curves have been selected from two different points of view Remarks The method construct surfaces that cover only the rectangular patches formed by the curves without interpolating them necessarily see next figures DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 68 15 September 2011 The method can be applied to curves that degenerate to points thus forming triangular patches Note that the point should be explicitly given as guide point In the next figure the lower curve in one direction is a single red point which forms the triangular patch along with next red curve and the blue curves in the other direction which intersect at this point After you have selected the first group of curves the program may suggest additional curves that you can use to make your second group of curves The example net to the right is used to illustrate this The system suggests two additional curves The user chooses to use the original curves The resulting curved shell is showed to the right The system suggests two additional curves The user chooses to use the suggested curves The resulting curved shell is showed to the right Note the differences between the two resulting curved shells DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 69 15 September 2011 3 3
121. bed Dependent Super Spring stiffness Os TCT gg Un Nm upport4 upport3 rz I fo Nm Z Cancel Apply Y The prescribed displacement per loadcase is applied from InsertlExplicit Load Prescribed Displacement In this case Support3 receives 6 0 25m while Support4 is given 6 0 5m Insert Prescrined Displacement in LC_Split Insert Prescrined Displacement LC_Split Results from analysis shown below Cancel Cancel EL Apply Apply PDispt Name PDisp2 Support Support Support Support Translations and Rotations Translations and Rotations dx fo m m rx fo deg deg dx 0 m m rx fo deg deg dy 0 25m m ry 0 deg deg dy 0 5m m ry 0 deg deg dz 10 m m 0 deg deg dz 10 m 0 deg deg DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 108 15 September 2011 The saved report may be used to verify the prescribed displacements by investigating the boundary conditions under the Tab Supports and the translation or rotation under the Tab Loadcases see below EJ Microsoft Excel UM11 xls File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Adobe PDF a question for help xus J 1 ee epos 10 8 3 O A B ta 21 By
122. ber 2011 If you have existing guiding geometry like guiding points you can create a guide plane by clicking on 4 snap points You do this from the InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Plan In this case a guide plane is defined between the 4 reference points with 4 equal spacings in u and v direction You may modify number of spacings and their relative lengths by selecting the guide plane RMB and Properties In this case the automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each guide plane you create the default name is GuidePlane 3 2 2 Guide point Below is shown how to define a guide point it may be defined from the InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Point Dialog Insert Tools Help Beam Plate M m EE You may now specify a co ordinate Suppor niin Poly Curve Dialog value or move the mouse to the s Guide Line Dialog TRUM Point graphical window By clicking a reference point the co ordinate canal nore gt g Fillet Curves Dialog Guide Point Dialog Position x Feat Edge E HE Guide Plane values are automatically found from preme ind uk tmd am the reference point Guiding Geometry Guide Line Profile Guide Spline LJ Curve Guide Arc Elliptic n Guide Circle Explicit Load Load Case Model Curve Load Combination 7 Filet Curves Environment
123. between PII and 05 Apr 2008 03 39 05 Apr 2008 03 40 UM M Make a shell from two curves and one plate This example is basically the same as above but in this case the selection is in opposite sequence Curvel Curve2 and PI2 Single click PI2 to end the lofting There is G1 continuity between and P12 05 Apr 2008 03 45 05 Apr 2008 03 46 UM UM DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 59 15 September 2011 Make a shell from one shell two curves and a plate It is also possible to use shells 1 e curved plates as start and stop conditions in lofting This example shows the G1 continuous shell PIS created from in sequence the shell P14 Curvel Curve2 and plate P12 05 Apr 2008 03 56 05 Apr 2008 03 57 UM UM Make a shell from one plate three curves and a plate In this example the new shell is G1 continuous with PI1 but not with P12 The lofting sequence is P11 Curvel Curve3 Curve2 and P12 Curve3 is halfway between Curvel and Curve2 in this case 05 Apr 2008 04 07 05 Apr 2008 04 07 UM UM DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 60 15 September 2011 Make two shells from one plate three curves and a plate The two new shells and Pl4 are made Gl continuous with their neighbour plates P11 and PI2 respectively by using a curve as stop and start condition The shell is creat
124. between the information on the FEM file and the concepts properties they represent so you can actually modify parts of your model properties and loads without having to completely remesh the model Instead GeniE updates the properties for the modified elements and regenerates the loads if needed This implies that the imported external element node numbers are kept and saves much time when working with large models When deleting point masses and boundary conditions the internal element numbers may be rearranged Properties that can be changed without changing the element node numbers are e cross sections for beam DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 22 15 September 2011 e thickness for plate e materials e explicit loads only point and line loads on beams e Local coordinate system for beam e Eccentricities Loads that can be changed without changing the element node numbers are e Gravity loads e Line loads on beams e Point loads e Node accelerations Structure concepts that can be changed without changing the element node numbers are e Point masses e Support points Some properties and loads cannot be imported into GeniE but will stay untouched on the FEM file as long as the mesh is not regenerated If loads are added or modified all non imported loads will be destroyed The following properties and loads are not imported into GeniE e Shim connections e Linear dependencies
125. carried out to find the overall strength capacity of the structure For such analysis the entire structure is analysed using either a direct load approach all loads are manually defined by the user or an integrated load approach where wave load effects pressure and accelerations are computed by HydroD and seamlessly used by the analysis tool Sestra In the latter case the modelling wave load generation and analysis should be run from BriX Explorer configured for Sesam using GeniE HydroD and Sestra The global FE model as shown to the right contains all structural parts and has one global mesh default setting in this case 3 m Local analyses are performed to document strength on a more detailed level as a result from the global structural analysis requirements in rules and regulations or from engineering experience In the example to the right the area of interest has a more dense mesh setting 1 m than the rest Furthermore the local area has been meshed prior to the other structure to ensure a best possible FE model in this area The local model may be analysed together with the rest of the structure or by using sub modelling techniques in Submod use BriX Explorer configured for Sesam to control the workflow process For fatigue analysis or when computing SCF s Stress Concentration Factor a mesh size equal to the plate thickness is often used In the example to the right a part of the structure has been meshed with f
126. ce Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws 1 nner Y Hz am Description Wet surface Footprint Pressure FEM Loadcase L Name SLoadi Footprints Load Intensities Constant Pressure W 4 2 m d i iif SR m Constant Pressure 77 f Constant intensity 100 Intensities Wet Surface Select a wet surface to apply loads on wS Inner Y Footprints Constant Pressure Constant intensity Intensities DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 116 3 Point Varying load Name SLoad4 Footprints Intensities 15 May 2008 06 48 Wet Surface Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws_0 uter 3 Point Varying Pressure Point 1 lPoint B m 0 5 m 5 m 2 m0 m 5 5 3 Point B m 0 5 m 5 m Pressure 1 00 Pa Pa 2 50 Pa Pa 3 o Pa Pa Linear function load Name SLoad6 Footprints Intensities Wet Surface Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws_0 uter v Linear Pressure Function Create a pressure function described by the equation k1 x k2 y k3 2 k4 0 Pa m 50 Pa m 100 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Description Wet surface Footprint Pressure Name SLoad4 Load Intensities Three point varying Pressure 1 Point 6 m 0 5 m 5 m 100 Pa 2 Point 6
127. column If you want to remove the plugs inside the incoming tubes repeat the process by dividing the column and deleting the superfluous parts In the bottom right picture the incoming braces have been removed for visibility 2 a DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 T2 15 September 2011 3 3 1 11 Divide using guide curves This example shows how to use a guide curve to divide a plate Select plate P RMB and Divide Choose divide using input curve and specify Curvel from graphics or manually Plate PL is now divided into two and the new plate P 2 is created Apply r 4 Divide Plates Cancel P4 Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Plates Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates _ Divide plate using input curve Curvel Divide plates with plane cca 2 Point Vector 3 Points Z coord m Plate PL may now be deleted if you want to create cut out 3 3 1 12 Punch using guide curves The above example assumed divide using one continuous line In the example below a plate is punched divide and trim using multiple curves This operation is available from ToolslStructurelCurve Punch Notice that the curves can not be in the same plane as the structure to be punched in this case the curves are Im above the plate Select the curves that form a closed loop o
128. constants in the generic expression for the different set of rules Rule CSR Bulk CSR Bulk CSR Tank DNV IAI General Plate Stiffener 1 For CSR tank the f FEM as default be 0 5 but It should be remembered that fac FEM should be set to 1 0 for the fine mesh area of local models and fac FEM should be set to 0 25 for fatigue models For CSR tank Corrosion addition from tables are given as sum of additions from each side The user may split the rule value this so that 50 is applied to each side of the plate 2 For CSR bulk No minimum for internal stiffeners For CSR bulk Corrosion addition from tables are given for each side of the plate The user assigned these values to the relevant side s of the plates in Genie DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 183 15 September 2011 6 2 1 6 Corrosion addition CSR Bulk example The thickness correction t according to the CSR bulk ship rule is ta max 2mm RoundupOS5 t t 2 0 5mm where t 1s correction addition on the front plate side positive surface normal side t 1s correction addition on the back plate side negative surface normal side Roundup05 means round up to nearest 0 5mm e g te t 4 2mm then use 4 5mm Corrosion additions are defined from EditlProperties Corrosion Addition the browser from compartment properties see next Sections Fl UM Mesh2 AddThickness m Create Edit corrosion addition Eg Analysis
129. cting the eccentricities of the equipments Beams And Mass Eccentric Mass centre of gravity This may be the desired mass model when working with large FootpintMass o equipments to form uniform blanket loads UDL or blanket loads For this alternative GeniE will calculate the mass elements as for the first option Eccentric Mass but neglect all eccentricities Hence it is not necessary to associate section and material properties to the equipment in this case 28 May 2008 07 55 a Analysis 1 LC1 Force N Length m The mass elements are flushed down to the euioadcase 1 footprint level There is one finite element node inside each of the footprint area 28 May 2008 07 58 In this case the mesh density has been a 1 s e e Analysis 1 refined so that there are five finite element nodes inside each footprint area Hence Force N Length m FEM Loadcase 1 five mass elements are created per footprint area DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 155 15 September 2011 4 7 Verify and document loads and masses There are a number of ways to verify and document the loads load combinations and masses For detailed assessment of each load this is described in the previous Sections For a more general overview you can use the print features in the FilelSave Report and view it in your notepad editor Internet Explorer MS Excel or MS Word notic
130. ctural analysis Include structure mass with rotation fiel Sum over Equipments Sum Mass Kg 0 Explicit conceptual load N COG m 0 0 0 Fx 500 Fy 0 Fz 1000 es D appiedi ioed IN ae M lc Fx 500 Fy 0 F2 1000 Display in Input Units M FEM Loadcase number C Display in Database Units v OK Cancel Apply A point load can be applied anywhere on a plate You make a point load on a plate in the same way that you make a point load on a beam explained in the previous paragraph During meshing the point load will be moved to the nearest FEM node A point load is placed on a plate the illustration to the right shows the model in Default display DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 99 15 September 2011 After meshing when looking at the model in the Mesh e lt view it can be observed that the point load has been moved to the nearest node in the mesh b Qe If you want to avoid the point load being moved you can insert feature edges to change the mesh or make the mesh finer 4 2 3 Line loads on beams Insert Tools Help A line loads can be applied to the entire or parts of beam or stiffener The load can consist of the load attributes Fx Fy RAR Al eee and Fz and they can be constant or linearly varying mid Furthermore the line loads may be defined as own objects or m Description FEM Loadcase FEM LC Rule
131. d DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 29 15 September 2011 3 2 10 Model guiding geometry using existing snap features Common for all modelling in GeniE is that you can build on existing snap points like for example a beam end a plate corner or vertices along a guiding line see Section in the following for a definition of vertices Guiding geometry can also be inserted using such techniques An example of this can be when inserting a guide plane between four existing snap points In case you want to insert a guide plan between the points as shown to the right a quick way is to insert the guide plane form the tool button Alternatively you can do the same from Beam Plate Support Guide Plane Dialog Joint Poly Curve Dialog Mass Guide Line Dialog Compartment gw Fillet Curves D
132. d Load Case Load Combination Environment gt The longitudinal plates of a simplified hull will be used to explain how to create plates using Flat Region This example is chosen because using Flat Region is a Create Flat Region on Plane quick and safe way to create transverse web frames z Point Vector 3 Points Determined by coord fo m First we want to insert plates in an intersecting plane at X 0 m Create Flat Region on Plane Join Flat Regions Select Flat Regionis in 2D view Close y p Point Vector 3 Points Determined by A coord 10 EF m Join Flat Regions By clicking the button Select Flat Region s in 2D View the graphics window show the plane you have selected Intersecting plates are shown as grey lines where they cross the plane In this example there are 5 bounded areas that can be used for creating flat plates DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 53 15 September 2011 Three of the five bounded areas have been clicked In this case the checkbox Join Flat Regions has been left unchecked This means that the plates you create are not joined as you make them The plates normal vectors are not necessarily in the same direction This can be seen on the illustration where one plate appears red and the two other appear grey in color Click on Return to 3D View to go
133. d I In case the stiffeners were part of the selection both stiffeners and plates are split into minor parts depending on C Divide Guide Curves NN C Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts the intersection pattern Divide Plates Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates C Divide plate using input curve C Divide plates with plane A m 2 Point Vector 3 Points DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 71 15 September 2011 3 3 1 10 Divide and trim using existing structure To trim a structural part to another it is necessary to divide first and then delete the superfluous parts Two examples of such are shown In the first case a horizontal plate P 4 is intersecting a conical transition part like for example at the transition between a semi submersible pontoon and column or in a crane pedestal Select the plate P 4 RMB and Divide using option explode all plates Plate P 4 is now split in two parts PIS and P 6 Select plate P 6 and delete You have now a horizontal plate trimmed to the conical transition part gt Another example is when tubes are intersecting another tube typically in tubular joint This example shows two tubes intersecting another tube Select both incoming tubes RMB and Divide using option explode all plates Select the inner parts of the tubes and delete them The tubes are now trimmed to the
134. d Divide A typical example is shown in the following This case assumes that a part of the hull shall be divided at a given elevation and longitudinal length in order to e g change plate thickness First select the plate RMB and Divide use option Divide plates with plane The temporary plane is now shown with blue colour C C Divide Plates Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Plates Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates C Divide plate using input curve Divide plates with plane A Y 2 Point Vector 3 Points Z coord 6 m The upper part shall be divided at a longitudinal distance 3 m from the origin Repeat the process above but use a plane perpendicular to the x axis Apply Divide Plates Cancel C Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Plates C Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates C Divide plate using input curve Divide plates with plane AX Y 2 Point Vector 3 Points Y coord m After dividing the plates you can now assign the various plate thicknesses to the plates The picture to the right has been made by labelling the plate thickness properties the plate thicknesses and the plate names Furthermore the colour coding has been modified by using the features available from the View OptionlColor Coding See User manual Vol I for further references PI
135. d a normal vector to the mirror plane Bl Copy E Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation xj The first task is to specify a point in the mirror plane in this case from a snap point Point in mirror plane P1 X Mirror plane normal vector Mirrored point Normal vector Mi Copy Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General trap Point in mirror plane F1 Point 2 222222222 m 8 333333333 m 0 m Mirror plane normal vector Mirrored point Normal vector Preview Cael Second step is to define a vector normal to the mirror plane in this case picked from the graphical window x Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Paint in mirror plane F1 Point 2 222222222 me 333333333 m Mirror plane normal vector VeotorBal2 222226847e 01 m Mirrored point Normal vector Preview Cad DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 38 15 September 2011 Copy move objects using scale A scale operation requires two input parameters the scaling factor and the point to be used as the scaling center The scaling factor should be set to a value above 1 if you want to increase the size of your selection and below 1 if you want to decrease it Translate Rotate Miro
136. d control a finite element mesh how to run analysis and finally how to look at results 1 1 How to read this manual Chapter 2 Concept modelling strategies gives an overview on the importance of deciding the concept modelling strategies for plate and shell structures This Chapter should be read carefully to get an overview on alternatives and also various strategies that can be selected before or during the modelling The rest of the Chapters give relevant examples on the functionality used to make plate and shell structure For small frame models the user is advised to follow the steps in the GeniE User Manual Volume I the main user manual For analysis involving wave and pile soil analysis typically jackets and jack ups the user should also consult the GeniE User Manual Volume II A command from the menu list also referred to as the pulldown menu is written like this InsertlBeam Dialog The name of a tool button is written like this Basic plate A function buttons 15 referred to like this F1 GeniE comes with a context sensitive menu You invoke this menu by pushing your right mouse button when the mouse is located above a selected object In this manual this operation is termed RMB The commands on the context sensitive menu are written like this Join Beams Viewing this manual assumes the usage of Adobe Acrobat Reader version 8 0 or higher You may use older versions but then you don t have access to important features like e g fr
137. d draught at origin e Make a model like above e Define a wet surface like above e Makealoadcase e Insert explicit load surface load select the wet surface select pressure and use option Javascript e Edit the heel angle around global x axis and draught in the js file below e Cut and paste the content of the js file into the javascript window HeelAngle 20 Draught 4 5 m HeelAngleRad HeelAngle Math PI 180 Zlocal z Math cos HeelAngleRad y Math sin HeelAngleRad if Zlocal lt Draught return 1 G 1025 kg m3 Draught Zlocal else return 0 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 118 15 September 2011 The picture to the right shows 15 mai 2008 09 32 a condition with Drau ght E UM Static Pressure Analysis 1 4 5 m and HeelAngle 0 deg Le static Pressure FEM Loadcase Description Wet surface footprint Pressure Name SLoadi Load Intensities Function x v 2 1 Heel ngle 0 Draught 4 500000 m HeelAngleRad Heel ngle Math PI 180 Zlocal z Math cos Heel ngleRad y Math sin Heel ngleRad if Zlocal lt Draught return 1 G 1025 kgjm3 Draught Zlocal else return 0 In this case the parameters 15 mai 2008 10 34 UM Static Pressure have been modified to LC Static Pressure Draught 3 0 m and FEM Loadcase 1 HeelAngle 10 deg Description Wet surface Footprint Pressure Name SLoadi Load Intens
138. defined by the extent of the support curves The same model is used to explain this alternative please notice that support curves have been defined along the bottom and top flanges In other words there are no dependencies between the end of the beam and the edge of the web except for the single point of contact This 15 not a realistic scenario but it 15 used to explain the functionality The support curves defining the slave nodes specify dependencies in y and z directions Mame zm Position Boundary Condition C Boundary Stiffness Matris Boundary conditions M Lets change y and z Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super M Let rs change and rz Fined Free Prescribed Dependent Super To ensure that the support curves and support Region of dependent points points are selected you need to tick off the Include all edges in region relevant option in the dialogue box Include only support points and curves in region so te Pointi24 m 2 5 m 4 m Box extent x m Box extent r 2 m Box extent 2 Local coordinate system orientation LocalSystemfVector3d 1 m 0 m Vector ea d As can be seen from the results to the right there is no dependencies between the incoming beam and the edge of the web except for the finite element connection itself In this case the flat plain does not remain flat as for the rigid body motion behaviour DET N
139. do this to see some results when setting the view to one of the result views The default presentation view can be set from ToolslAnalysis Presentation or from ALT P Loadcase gt 30 May 2008 09 13 LC mass UM_ Analysis LinStatic Attribute Component Surface LC mass Displacement al Top Force kN Length m Present as Result presentation FEM Loadcase 3 Displacements All deformed Min 6 Max 0 06B4874 Contour plot Settings Numeric annotation Settings C Vector plot Settings C Beam diagram Settings 6 848736e 002 6 321910 002 5 735084e 002 5 268258e 002 4 7414326 002 4 214607e 002 36877816002 P stress vectors F1 3 160955e 002 2 634129e 002 2 107303e 002 Global min mas 1 580477e 002 Additional presentation M Deformed shape settings 1 053652e 002 5 268258e 003 Default presentation Hbdefaul presentation See the next Section for more information on how to present results change 7 3 Edit analysis activities The pre defined analysis activities can be edited from the activity monitor view or from the browser Both meshing options and specific run time SEE Duration Status Generate Input AE M 1 LinSkatic Analysis 45 SUCCESS parameters can be modified For meshing 1o 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 1s ee 1 1 1 Delete loads Er 1 1 2 Generate loads Os Lccess options sel
140. ds Save HTML Report DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 GeniE User Manual Vol III 96 15 September 2011 A load combination is built up from load cases or other load combinations Each contribution to the load combination may be scaled with a factor A load combination may be created from InsertlLoad Combination This will create Insert Tools Help Beam a load combination including all load cases and combinations that are part of the Plate analysis activity that 1s set to active The scaling factor for all load cases is set to 1 0 In this case the analysis activity In Place is set to active A load combination may be modified by selecting lom o it RMB and select Properties Double click one of the load cases that are part of the load combination to change the load factor or to remove the load case from the load combination In this case Wind West has a factor of 1 4 while Wind North is checked off You may also select the load cases you want to use in a load combination RMB and select New Load Combination If you do this in the Load Case folder such load combinations become part of all analysis activities unless you de select them The example to the right shows two load combinations of which one has been created in the Load Case folder Support Joint Mass Compartment M Insert Load Combination x Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry
141. e 1s any plates in between and will only fill the open voids When joining the plates in the web frame and copying the plate to selected positions the final configuration looks like the adjacent picture DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 80 Another example be if you want to make a longitudinal model with watertight bulkheads in this case a part of a semi submersible pontoon High lighted curves are used in a sweep operation of 50m in x direction Curves to sweep from selection Curved Curve2 Curve3 Curvel Curve5 Curve6 Sweep curves along C Curve Dedi f Vedo 5000 Cancel Apply This example shows two ways of inserting watertight bulkheads in the first case a cover curve operation is used The watertight bulkhead on the starboard side is created by covering the void between the highlighted curves The watertight bulkhead on the port side is made by making a rectangular plate same size as the guide plane divide it by using option Explode all plates in selection into simpler plates To trim the web frame to the hull the superfluous parts high lighted must be deleted Having joined the starboard and port web frames it is easy to move and copy the web frame to the selected position In this case it is moved 5 m and copied twice with length 15 m User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 AE PTE T p HM 3j
142. e a finite element model only the applied v Automatic load combination FEM numbering those used in analysis properties are written to the FEM Round aff Mesh Density file If you want to add the unused properties then you M Adjust number of elements Oe should activate the Include unused properties je Viie bai E 9 When you make a load combination the finite element numbers will be in accordance with the default settings 1 e the finite element loadcase numbers for load combinations will always start after the highest number for a basic load case or a wave load case from Wajac In case you want to control the finite element loadcase numbering manually you should de select the option Automatic load combination FEM numbering GeniE will ensure that the maximum mesh densities are according to or smaller than the mesh settings applied to the model In some cases this may lead to a more dense mesh than you desire In such cases you can instruct GeniE to work with approximate mesh density settings 1 e open up for finite elements having a slightly larger size than the maximum size specified by you To do this you need to tick off the Round off Mesh Density 04 May 2008 16 47 04 May 2008 16 48 UM Mesh4 UM Mesh4 Analysis1 Analysis 1 Tote KL Mesh density specified 2 0m Mesh density specified 2 0m No finite elements are larger than this size since There are elements larger than size 2 0 but close to since the Round o
143. e change of line load position 0 m 22 m 16 m You can document the line loads as shown on previous pages DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 102 15 September 2011 4 2 3 3 Generic line loads In case you have a line load that is not constant or linearly varying you can use the feature generic Line Load Function To switch to this feature drag the vertical Intensity Bar until you see the input parameters for Component Load By checking the option for Javascript you have access to advanced line load definition It is required that you have knowledge on Javascript as you need to make your own function describing the line load x x Name LLoadt4 Name LLoadt4 Footprints Footprints Generic Line Load Function Component d Component Load m function component dFunction x y z Linear Javascript Intensities Parametric Local coordinate system alSystem vector3d 1 m0 n Local coordinate system LocalSystem Vector3d 1 m 0 n Apply Close Apply In the example below two line loads have been applied to the same beam The first one is a cosine distribution in horizontal direction while the other is a sinus distribution in vertical direction For both options a parametric representation is used This means that the length of the beam 15 parameterized between 0 and 1 Name LLoadi 4
144. e curve is computed based on the orientation of the Guiding Geometry x ide Poi Ni two straight lines and the radius to be used If you use the option Profile s Guide Line m xem 17 Guide Spline Fillet Curves the minimum possible radius without trimming any Equipmen LJ Boly cuve lines will be used as default In the Fillet Curves Dialog you also Explicit Load a Guide Arc Elliptic Load Case 27 Guide Circle have the option of specifying the radius Load Combination pq Model Curve Environment El Fillet Curves In the example to the right there are two curves perpendicular to each other When using the option Fillet Curves Dialog referencing to the lines either by giving the name or by finding the name from the graphical window and specifying the radius the composite curve is generated In this case Curve6 and Curve7 are used with a radius of 0 5m and the composite curve Curve8 is generated As can be seen the straight lines have been extended to ensure continuation between straight and curved lines La Fillet Curves First Curve Curve at Point 0 06333721 429n Second Curve at Point 3 4969871 04 m 0 ame Radius 0 5 m When using a value for radius larger than the minimum to fit the lines and the curve the straight lines will be trimmed so that there is a continuation between the straight and curved parts This is shown in the exam
145. e eccentric length Name Length m Length m m 3 tonne tonnefm 3 Circumference m m 2 ssal es o 0 0 0 9 112338 63 0807 57 9281 O O A at po RTA Material Name Thickness Name Area m 2 Volume m3 Mass tonne Density tonne m 3 Mat_plates 1277 64 10 2241 0 0102211 0 001 Mat plates 324 011 324011 000324011 0 001 In case you want to document the mass and COG per beam or plate the report will include the following Name Description Mass fonne Im Y Cog Im 7 Cog iml 555071 7318 7 9 56071 Name Description Y Cog m Z Cog m 556071 7231920 Pl 5 Erg 197 E 0 00057603 1 2 009 19 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 159 15 September 2011 5 APPLY BOUNDARY CONDITIONS Boundary conditions are normally used to describe how a structure is fixed to its support conditions either it is on ground or other structural parts Notice that there must be sufficient boundary conditions applied to the model to prevent rigid body motion in the structural analysis The boundary conditions are also used to describe additional conditions than how the structure 1s fixed e full fixation i e fixed in all six degrees of freedom this is the program default e free to translate or rotate in one or several degrees of freedom e ground spring supp
146. e input file to be used by Sestra see following Section The Jacobi mesh rule allows you to control the relative Jacobi determinant either by stopping the meshing or splitting a quadrilateral in triangular elements if the determinant exceeds a threshold maximum or minimum DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 191 15 September 2011 If the rule is set to fail when the relative Jacobi 05 May 2008 03 40 determinant exceeds 4 0 on the model above no mesh M Mesr will be created The reason for this is that there is one g plate only and the maximum value is above 4 0 If there are other plates in the model these will receive a mesh if the Jacobi determinant test does not fail y p elative Jacobi EN VVVVVA NM dd i o L Rules Meshing The example below shows that quadrilateral elements with a Definitions Relative Jacobi rel relative Jacobi determinant higher Bac MAKE E than 3 0 are split in triangular min 2 al elements MET Spitelement intwa gt As can seen the highlighted Minimum Jacobi J min elements above red and black are divided in triangular elements and there are no values higher than 3 0 Fail meshing if Jmin lt Split element in bea if Jmin lt La 55 Jj i7 0 34 Cancel Apply 05 May 2008 03 46 05 May 2008 03 47 UM Mesh5 UM Mesh5 Relat
147. e lied Loads Mew Loadcase Recompute Load Sums Mew Load Combination Exclude From analysis Set Active Mew Load Combination The view Results All 1s a pure results view while the other view includes the finite element mesh 02 Jun 2008 13 46 02 Jun 2008 13 46 tube tube Analysis 1 Analysis 1 LC Vert LC Vert Force N Lengt FEM Loadcase Displacements All Min 0 Max 5 90613e 005 Force N Lengt FEM Loadcase 2 Displacements All Min 0 Max 5 90613 005 5 906127 005 5 451809e 005 4 997492e 005 4 5431746 005 4 088857 005 634539e 005 180222e 005 2 725905e 005 2 271587e 005 1 8172706 005 1 3629528 005 9 086349e 006 4 5431746 006 0 000000e 000 5 906127e 005 5 451809 005 4 997492e 005 4 543174 005 4 088857 005 6345396 005 180222e 005 2 725905e 005 2 271587e 005 Z 1 817270 005 1 362952e 005 Y 9 086349e 006 4 543174e 006 0 000000 000 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 221 15 September 2011 The result attribute can be changed from ToolslAnalysis Presentation or x ALT P oadcase LE mas You should specify which attribute you want to use as your default view Br a The default value is project specific i e you need to set the default for mmm each workspace Displacements G stress Beam Forces The settings t
148. e plate edges will remain flat when loads inducing rotations are applied to the model rigid body motion In the example above loads are applied to the beam and deformations are applied to the plate edges as a result of the rigid link support In this case the independent points translation DOF are fully coupled with the dependent point the beam end As can be seen the plate edge remains flat where the finite element nodes along the plate edge are forced to move as a plane using the characteristics of the beam cross section For cargo hold analysis the dependent points may be partially coupled some degrees of freedom to the independent point to simulate the connection with the structure outside the cargo hold model In this case the relevant cross section of the hull does not behave as a rigid body the deflections and rotations depend on which degrees of freedom that are coupled between the master and slave nodes Description Point Mame Master nade Typically the slave nodes along the highlighted edge are connected for the translation degrees of freedom of the master node When using GeniE together with the Nauticus Hull FEA template the boundary conditions as shown to the right are automatically applied When all degrees of freedom are dependent between the master and the slave nodes the first example above all edges in a region is included In the second example some of the degrees of freedom a
149. e same when you have declared a mesh satisfactory by locking its mesh coordinates Typical scenarios are when you model 2D parts like a web frame and assemble these into a 3D structure like a hull with web frames Mesh locking is often used together with mesh parts of the structure where the mesh coordinates are locked before they are used in a global model Also notice that the mesh locking is a property which means that when you copy a structural member the mesh lock co ordinates are also part of the copy operation A small example on how to use this 19 May 2008 16 13 A UM Mesh16 methodology is given in the following The goal is to tune the mesh for the web frame and ensure that the mesh is reproduced for all instances of the same web frame The mesh to the right has been 19 May 2008 16 17 UM_Mesh16 generated using a local mesh density 0 25m and Advancing Front Mesher When you are satisfied with this mesh and you want to use it for all positions where this web frame occur the mesh is locked by selecting the mesh RMB and Mesh Locking Labels ColorCode Mesh Locking Unlock Mamed set View options Visible model Mesh lock co ordinates may be unlocked from same menu as above DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 211 The co ordinates of the mesh that has been locked may be labelled Select the mesh RMB and Mesh Lock Coordinates ColorCode 4 Element numbers
150. e you need MS Office 2003 edition or later The report generated from FilelSave Report also includes the finite element loads used by the analysis program as well as the reaction forces from the analysis itself The example below shows the loads for a model with 4 basic loadcases and 1 load combination The report is viewed in MS Word Select Loads and click Add Selected to include load reporting into the Define Report report E Mame LE sumi M Journal report generation Close ME Report Report Tithe include the relevant parts to document Available Chapters Add Selected Loads N L Report X Frame Code Check Load Summary Applied Plate Code Check A E Load Summary FEM Load H Load Summary FEM Reaction AE Load Summary FEM Differenci Load Sum Overnde Number Format Load Combination Number format Scientific O Load Details Conceptual ana TN LU Load Details Applied Point Load ou ipia Save Report Surface Load i Temperature Load eport format Support Displacement _ File name LC sum Save View LI 4 m This generates a report with the following content Model Id Sign LC_sumi nek Description Date LC_sum 07 May 2008 Model file name Last saved C Program FilesiDNVS GeniE_D4010 Workspaces LC_sum 07 May 2008 14 40 34 1 1 All loadcases 1 1 1 All loadcases Load Summary 1 1 2 All loadcases L
151. ect Remove intemal edges 9 with the ends of vertices used to describe the shape of a hole or a COMMUNI structural component In such cases the Remove internal vertices w Eliminate points not required to representthe may be used to improve the mesh layout This option is system default OLET ti f distorted quadrilaterals into elements with as It prevents the creation o q around holes with buckling stiffeners large angles often close to 180 degrees The effect of such idealisation is shown using a plate with a hole and two stiffeners The stiffeners do not intersect with the ends of the vertices describing the curved part of the hole There is a short distance from the intersection to the vertice end this is highlighted below As a consequence a very short side of an element is generated The shorter the length of this line is the worse the finite element becomes The idealisation Remove internal vertices moves the incoming beam to the nearest end of a vertice used to describe the hole 03 May 2008 21 54 03 May 2008 21 57 UM_Mesh UM_Mesh Analysis1 Analysis1 a 1 05 16 34 034 4 No idealisation Idealisation performed Significantly improved mesh Jacobi determinant 4 89 Comparable Jacobi determinant 1 24 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 180 15 September 2011 The Remove Internal Edges 1s used when you want to eliminate Remove Inte
152. ect the Activity Meshing e 4 and Edit Activity M 1 1 3 Delete mesh 15 SUCCESS M 1 1 4 Generate mesh Os SUCCESS Eg UM Analysis Mame Description MA 1 2 Linear Structural Analys 3s Success Yes EHE Analysis LE flare LaadCase AR 1 3 Load Results 05 Success HA Activities far LC hel LoadCase 5 9 LinEigen RE LC mass LoadCase 3 c1 LinStatic ELC total LoadCombination 4 Am 2 S RIE 2 5 LinStatic step 1 Er LinStatic step 2 Linear Structur LinStatic step 3 R LinStatic step 3 Load Results LT Load Cases Edit Mesh Activity The main parameters are td Mesh activity e Export beams as members If not selected the Fiegenerate mesh cption FEM file will not contain member information Always Regenerate Mesh n M Esport beams as members but only pure finite element data v Smart load combinations Override Global Superelement Data e Smart load combinations In this case the load combinations are not transferred to analysis the load combination is done in GeniE or Platework Framework or Xtract after analysis Top Superelement Type Superelement Set Mesh Priority e The Set Mesh Priority and Mesh Subset T Mesh Subset options are described in Chapters 6 5 and 6 6 Pile boundary condition Pile Soil Interaction Cancel Apply DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 216 15 September 20
153. ed from InsertlPlatelSkin Curves or from the tool button Insert Tools Help Beam Flat Plate Dialog Support GE Sweep Curves Dialog Joint EJ Flat Plate Mass Een cuves mp Sweep Curve Feature Edge When using the skin operation you need to select click on which curves to skin in between To stop the input sequence you double click the curve Typically between three curves it will look like When moving the mouse over the curve it becomes orange A selected curve stays orange and is denoted the sequence number To the far right you can see that the first curve in the input sequence is denoted 1 The picture to the right shows that two lines have been added 1 and 2 and the third 1s due to be selected The picture to the far right shows the plate as a result of these operations notice that the third curve is the stop position and it is necessary to click on this curve two times When making plates based on skinning between curves there will always be full connectivity of the plates along the curve In other words there will be no cracks or openings However the degree of smoothness depends on how many curves are selected and how rapid the changes in curve occur DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 51 15 September 2011 In the example below there are 5 guide curves The picture to the left shows the 4
154. ed from lofting P11 Curvel and Curve3 while the shell P14 is built from Curve3 Curve2 and P12 Note that there is no Gl continuity between and P14 In this case Curve3 is not halfway between Curvel and Curve2 is highlighted below 05 Apr 2008 04 15 05 Apr 2008 04 18 UM U Make a shell from one plate and four curves 05 Apr 2008 04 41 05 Apr 2008 04 43 UM UM 5 X In this case the middle curves Curvel3 and Curves not parallel with Curvel Furthermore Curve8 has a curvature highlighted above As such this is an example relevant for modelling of hull forms in the fore and aft part of a floater The new shell is built using the sequence P11 Curvel Curvel3 Curves and Curves DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 61 15 September 2011 3 3 1 5 Insert using cover curves The term cover in this context mean fill between curves The curves may form closed loop of curves or they may consist of two individual curves in the latter case temporarily straight lines will be set up between the end points There are five examples to show how cover curves can be used The cover curve command is available from the context sensitive menu select objects RMB and Cover Curves In this example there are several curves that form a closed loop The cover operation will fill the surface defined by the closed loop Move Create Beam Create Support Curve C
155. ed on flat plates The surface loads may be constant linear varying three point varying or defined by a java script command All options are explained in the following except for the javascript option see previous chapter on beam line loads on how to do this A surface load is defined from the pulldown menu InsertlExplicit LoadlSurface Load The plate surface loads are normally defined using the polygon footprint move the slider Footprints below to select polygon footprint Surface loads defined using a wet surface as footprints are documented in the following chapter Pressure loads on shells Beam Plate Support M SLoad2 Footprint hat APCE RE Joint Mass Compartment Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry Footorints Profile Equipment Point Load Explicit Load Line Load Load Combination Prescribed Displacement Environment Line Temperature Surface Normal Wectorad 0 m m 1 m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 GeniE 109 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 A surface load may be either be a pressure normal to the plate a traction load parallel to the plate or a component load build up of components in global x y and z directions In addition there is a special type Dummy Hydro Pressure being used to define the extent of a hull and internal tanks subjected to hydrody
156. ed surface intersected by a horizontal plate Simply right click the topology line to access the command to insert a model curve in this case Curve3 Remember to double click the plate to get back to normal modelling view Create Beam Create Support Curve Create Feature Edge Create Model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 27 15 September 2011 3 2 9 Fillet curve Fillet curves are used to define the curvature between two straight lines Fillet curves are typically used when defining cut outs in surfaces like for example man holes or other openings When fillet curves are used the two straight lines in question and the fillet curves are automatically joined to a composite curve see also section on joining curves Fillet curves are inserted by referencing guiding lines The command is activated from amp K Bi InsertlGuiding Geometry Fillet Curves Dialog or from the tool button as shown to pid ji the right The automatic naming schema 15 used to define the names of each Guide Spine composite curve you create the default name is Curve LJ po Curve Guide Arc Elliptic n Guide Circle Beam Plate pq Model Curve E Fillet Curves h Support Guide Plane Dialog Joint Poly Curve Dialog Mass Guide Line Dialog Pdl Fillet Curves Dialog Feature Edge Guide Point Dialog cs nl HE Guide Plane The composit
157. ee any colour coding click E jw Comer angle larger than 145 deg anywhere in the graphic window 05 May 2008 03 04 UM Mesh5 Corner angle smaller than 20deg deg Relative Jacobi larger than 4 Min Jacobi smaller than zl Shortest edge smaller thar Absolute length 0 01 m Masimum aspect ratio 5 Is element a triangle Warping Node rel distance Ge 0 0001 05 2008 03 06 UM Mesh5 Similarly the picture to the right shows those finite elements with a relative Jacobi larger than 3 0 Add Elements Comer angle larger than 145 deg Comer angle smaller than 20deg deg M Relative Jacobi larger than 3 0 Jacobi smaller than 0 2 hs Shortest edge smaller than Absolute length 0 01 m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 173 15 September 2011 6 1 6 Colour coding Colour coding of the mesh is used to verify the relative Jacobi determinant or the actual plate thickness used in the finite element guisa KS Mesh Lacking analysis The plate mesh thickness is the same as the plate thickness except when corrosion addition is used see next Section To do colour coding select the mesh click RMB and select ColorCode visible model The example below shows the relative Jacobi for the horizontal plate colour coding as well as labels shown 03 May 2008 17 41 03 May 2008 17
158. ee text search and bookmarks table of content hyperlinks It is particularly noted that this User Manual documents all capabilities of GeniE If you do not have access to the program extensions Curved structure modelling Code checking of beams and Code checking of plates there are several items in this manual you do not have access to in your program These features are blanked out in your program version To run analysis you need to have Sestra Wajac and Splice installed depending on the type of analysis DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 1 2 Learning from tutorials for code checking GeniE comes with an on line help system HelplHelp Topics or F1 Its purpose is to provide easy access to User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 release notes limitations tutorials wizards and this user manual In addition it contains a detailed documentation of all available commands in the journalling system based on J script There are also videos showing how to do certain operations these are best viewed using resolution 1280x1024 The easiest way to find the tutorials 1s from GeniE s help page For modelling of plate and shell structures the most relevant tutorials are found under the category GeniE Tutorials Advanced Modelling GeniE Version D4 0 11 19 May 2008 Copyright c 1999 2008 DNV Sotherare GeniE Tutorials Basic and Codechecking GeniE Tutorials Advanced Modelling Int
159. elect the n Bil wind North LoadCase 1 Manual 5 Installation relevant load case RMB and Set Current Transport E eq Generate Applied Lois Recompute Load Sums loadcombination New Load Cambon The current load case has an identification check mark eer wind East Wind North m Delete Rename 4 2 1 Point loads on beams Point loads can be inserted along any position of a beam or stiffener it is not required to have a snap point or other physical connections with other object Point loads are defined from InsertlExplicit Load Point Load The example below shows a point load of 1000N in z direction applied at position Om 0m 12 5m Point loads may be inserted by specifying components Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz in global x y z directions or relative to a local x y z coordinate system Insert Point Load in LC Point load 11 Nov 2007 11 14 UM OK LC_Point_load FEM Loadcase 1 aa FA M Cancel Apply p Pi Name PLoad5 pl 0m Om 12 5m Forces and Moments Local coordinate system Fx JON N 0 N m Fy ON N My D N m N m Fz 1000 N Mz 0 N m N m To modify a point load graphically select the load RMB and Properties You may also move or copy the point load to other positions s from graphically select In the example below the load intensity has been modified as well as moved to a new position 11 Nov 2007 11
160. elow the guide plane in the graphic window will be highlighted El val3 revised EHE Analysis Transformations Folder LJ Capacity E Profiles Folder Environment 73 Points Ee Equipment EH GuidePlane Gurde Els Lg weight Lists Falder H Properties Hl Structure G Utilities When doing this in GeniE the actual browser name and object are highlighted not shown here because of visibility Observe that it is also possible to drill down the browser also from the right pane browser window If you e g double click the browser tab Points below you will open the content fn Genie vol3 revised Name Description Analysis Transformations Folder LJ Capacity Profiles Folder c Environment st Points Folder E Equipment HB GuidePlafi Plane Weight Lists Ca Curves Folder LJ Properties Gg Structure Point Point 2 22222 8 33333 0 a Utilities e Point Point 6 11111 833333 0 Ca Evaluators Port Point 3 88889 Sy Guiding Geometry Pont5 Pont 708 j Curves j Points j Profiles Lg Transformations Lg Mesh Priorities Lj Model Views Ga Reports Sets You may also benefit from limiting or adding objects to see in the graphic window There are powerful features for doing so and they are available by selecting an object s or named set s RMB and Visible Model You can also use the short commands typica
161. elow show the default set up for meshing and how to include mesh priorities Notice that you also can access the meshing rules from here The default mesh is shown on the previous pages while the mesh using the mesh priority Mesh sequence 1s depicted below La Mesh activity E gt Meshing Rules M Export beams as members Regenerate mesh option we Always Regenerate Mesh jw Smart load combinations Override Global Superelement Data Top Superelement Superelement Mesh_sequence Mesh Subset Pile boundary condition Pie Soil Interaction TN TN 19 May 2008 09 51 UM Mesh14 Analysis 1 In this case the plate P19 is meshed before the other plates The mesh from P19 now acts as starting conditions when meshing the remaining plates l Mesh activity x Regenerate mesh option Always Regenerate Mesh Meshing Rules M Export beams as members v Smart load combinations Override Global Superelement D ata Top Superelement Superelement M Set Mesh Priority Mesh Subset File Soil Interaction Cancel Pile boundary condition TN DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 207 15 September 2011 The example below shows that P19 is moved to level 2 while 111 is moved to level 1 Furthermore plate P16 is removed from the prioritised meshing 1 it is meshed after the plates that are part of the prioritized meshi
162. endent Super Spring stiffness EN m EN m kNm 5 5 Local co ordinate systems Boundary conditions are specified according to a Cartesian co ordinate system The program default 15 the global co ordinate system it is however possible to apply a local co ordinate system overriding the global system The procedure is to define the values according to the local co ordinate values and then rotate the boundary conditions so that the co ordinate system is aligned with the desired orientation There are two possible options e Rotate around the local co ordinate system and additionally relative to a plate shell for curves e Refer to a user defined co ordinate system The example below shows a boundary condition with its local coordinate system select RMB Labels Local Coordinate System the rotation select RMB Properties Local System and the new orientation as a result of a 45 degree rotation around local y co ordinate Properties Object Properties Support Local System Local system interpretation C Guide local system Oe Surface normal We Exolicitlocal system C Relative to plate tg Rotate local coordinate system about axis 49 deg CE DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 164 15 September 2011 The other option is to define a local co ordinate xj Object Properties Support Local System system select the
163. ent DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 193 15 September 2011 6 2 5 Mesh settings chord height This option may be used for global models where you want to have some control of the mesh along curved details It should be noted that the Advancing Front L Rules Meshing General M as Min Angle Jacobi Eliminate edge Chord Height Mesher will give a better mesh and should thus be used Maximum free relative chord height Relative chord height is taken as chord height Hchard over for local models where stress results are important for ile elles dt such details Lehord The chord height option will increase the mesh density so that the minimum requirement for a relative chord height is satisfied The relative chord height is the relation between the chord height and the chord length Cancel Apply The functionality 15 shown in the following using a plate with a cut out The plate is meshed with a mesh density of 4 meters The picture to the right shows the plate and the mesh green colour one typical chord height 0 732m and chord length 3 536m are highlighted In this case the relative chord height is 0 207 L Rules Meshing If the chord height option is used as shown to the right General Max Min Angle Jacobi Eliminate edge Chord Height there will be no changes to the mesh layout The E
164. ependent Super stiffness z kN m kN m v Let rx change ry and rz spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness A Ne _ E kNm kN m R O kNm kN m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 161 15 September 2011 Support curves are inserted from Insert Support Support Curves or from a line or edge In both cases a support curve is defined with boundary conditions according to the program default setting fixed in all six degrees of freedom To represent other boundary conditions edit the support curve by selecting the support curve RMB and Properties In the example below the boundary conditions are modified to simulate a hinged connection 1 e free to rotate in all directions ll Properties X Object Properties Mesh Property Support Local System Mesh Option The support curve shows the boundary conditions along the Curve The number and graphical size Mame EN depends on the settings you specify from the osition support visualisation icon support symbol size Boundary Condition C Founda Stiffness Matris Boundary conditions M Let change y and z Fined Free Prescribed Dependent Super M Let rs change ry and rz Free Prescribed Dependent Super a Support Calor Support Point Size SZE Support Symbol Size Bl support Transparency Support visible lt gt
165. eptember 2011 User Manual Vol III 01 May 2008 02 28 um PL_Pressure FEM Loadcase 4 Description Surface Pressure Name SLoad3 Load Intensities Linear varying Pressure 500 x 500 Pafm y D Pajm z 1000 Pa 01 May 2008 02 34 um PL Pressure FEM Loadcase 4 Description Surface Pressure Name SLoad4 Load Intensities Three point varying Pressure 1 Point O m 0 m 5 m 1000 Pa 2 Point 10 m 0 m 5 m 2000 Pa 3 Point 7 499999762 m 10 m 5 m 3000 Pa DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 111 15 September 2011 4 3 1 2 Traction loads Select surface load to type Traction As for Pressure a Traction load can be of type Constant 3 Point Varying linear function and Javascript The three first options are shown in the following The traction 15 parallel to the plate that it 1s acting on Constant traction 01 May 2008 02 48 Object Properties Load Interface Modify Surface Load um PL Pressure Name SLoad FEM Loadcase 4 Define at least 3 corner points 1 Point 0 m 0 m 5 m Point 10 m0 m 5 m Point 7 499999762 m 10 m 5 m Point O m 10 m 5 m Footprints Description Surface Traction Mame SLoa Load Intensities Constant Traction 1000 Pa Surface Normal 0 m 1 m Constant Traction Constant intensity 1000 Pa Pa Guide Direction Vector3a 0 m
166. er 2011 4 4 1 3 Open compartments and non structural plates A compartment is defined when there is a closed volume However there are cases where compartments can be defined when there is an opening in the volume An example of such may be bulk or container ships where the top of the compartment is open To close the volume without adding extra material and stiffness a non structural plate may be used The purpose of a non structural plate is to close the opening and as such they are not adding stiffness or material A non structural plate can not carry any loads In the example below a typical 3 cargo hold model of a bulkship is shown There are openings in the three centre compartments hence no compartments are generated Create Edit plate type x To close the opening a non structural plate needs to be Non Structural Membrane inserted Make a non structural property from Edit Properties Plate TypelNon Structural You can also do non__struc_plate this from the browser Remember to apply the property to the plates in question Cancel Apply Non structural plates are inserted at the top of the hatch coamings and compartments are automatically generated The mid compartment is highlighted above DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 128 15 September 2011 4 4 1 4 Non watertight bulkheads A compartment may have internal walls that are non watertight In case yo
167. erfaces 1s when you want to load the primary stiffeners but not the secondary stiffeners The footprint has been removed for better visibility DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 145 15 September 2011 The above loads assume a constant vertical acceleration field gravity is one example of such Adding a horizontal acceleration 10 m s will introduce shear forces and a force couple This is shown to the right where the acceleration field is horizontal only Note that when placing equipments along a vertical or sloped wall both vertical forces shear force and horizontal forces the force couple are created The beam forces in this case are shown below see following Sections on how to document the forces Load Case Properties LC_eqpm_full General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition Load Generator Structure Description na Full EMEE Applied Line Line Load post 0 Drill rig full BM5E Applied Line Line Load posz 29 13 5 125 2500 0 14705 95 Dl rg full BM58 Applied Line Line Load post 11 75 125 2500 147053 Grill ra full BMB58 Applied Line Line Load pose 11 125 2500 14 053 The example below shows the loads generated when using a footprint different than the bottom plan of the equipment The footprint may be of any type as long as it 1s an area In this case two skid beams are simulated yellow co
168. eristic mesh size Analysis characteristics e 755 000 DOF 1752 sec elapsed CPU on reference laptop computer Analysis results e Maximum Vonmises stress 4 392E07 Pa e Stress gradients look even more reasonable e Notice that fatigue analysis requires mesh size typically same as the plate thickness DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 16 For a structure like this it is also important which meshing algorithm is being used The Sesam quad mesher in GeniE 1s intended for relatively regular structures typically a ship hull a TLP a spar or semi submersible In many cases the Sesam quad mesher will give a satisfactory mesh for complex structures with additional mesh control In the example to the right the Sesam quad mesher has been used without any mesh control The highlighted areas indicate where mesh corner angles are above 150 degrees and the relative Jacobi factor is larger than 4 0 For structures like this the mesh quality normally becomes much better when using the advancing front quad mesher Without any additional mesh controls the mesh is significantly improved There are no mesh corner angles above 115 degrees in this case and there are no finite elements having a relative Jacobi factor larger than 1 7 The finite elements having a factor above 1 5 are shown to the right in other words a significant improvement just by changing the mesh algorithm User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET
169. ert Tools Help Beam Plate Support Joint Mass Compartment Feature Edge In a pure skin curve operation the new surface is created from referring curves only In lofting the procedure is somewhat different as the selection normally contains e a surface as a start condition e several curves the first curve must coincide with the start surface and the last curve must coincide with the end surface e a surface as a stop condition It is also possible to start or stop with a curve but lofting must include at least one surface In the following some examples will be given on how to use lofting Make a shell from a plate two curves and a plate In this case the new surface has been created from selecting in sequence P11 Curvel Curve2 and P12 Single click the last object of the lofting operation when this object is a plate in this case PI2 As in the case of pure skinning the selected items are highlighted in orange colour There is G1 continuity between P11 and as well as between and P12 05 Apr 2008 04 52 05 Apr 2008 04 54 UM UM DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 58 15 September 2011 Make a shell from one plate and two curves The shell is created using lofting by selecting P11 Curvel and Curve2 in sequence Double click the last object of the lofting operation when this object is a curve in this case Curve2 There is Gl continuity
170. es The input parameters to Sestra are described in the Sestra User Manual 7 3 Static eigenvalue and dynamic analysis Sestra is capable of solving static eigenvalue and dynamic analysis e A static analysis is based on structure boundary conditions and loads The loads may be of type manually applied loads wave loads or inertia loads e For an eigenvalue analysis also known as free vibration analysis the input parameters are structure boundary conditions and masses The mass matrix is build up from the structural mass the added mass from wave analysis and any explicitly masses point masses or equipments e For dynamic analysis or dynamic forced response analysis there are two options modal superposition in frequency and time domain direct frequency response method or direct time integration GeniE handles the two first alternatives directly from pre defined analysis activities It is also possible to do direct time integration by editing the input file to Sestra notice that result presentation must be done in Xtract To exemplify these options a common model is used The model has structural mass in addition to a load case with line loads The linear structural analysis is performed with the loadcase including the inertia load gravity and the line loads Activity M 1 Analysis Analysis Structural Analysis Load and Mass management v amp 1 1 Mesh
171. es The analyses may be carried out from GeniE using a pre defined activity see next Chapter including Sestra e Analyses where the loads are automatically applied according to the CSR Bulk rules This requires that the concept model including compartment information is exported to Nauticus Hull FEA template In addition to compartment loads the boundary conditions loads to the outer hull and corrosion addition are also automatically applied to the model The analyses may be carried out from GeniE using a pre defined activity see next Chapter including Sestra e Hydrostatic stability and hydrodynamic analyses where the compartments and the outer wet surface are used to define the panel model buoyancy and sea pressure and the compartments subjected to various content and filling degrees The hydrodynamic analyses and the subsequent structural analyses are carried out using Brix Explorer configured for Sesam including HydroD Wadam Wasim and Sestra e Structural analysis where corrosion addition is included Corrosion addition may be added to the compartments so that the additions apply to the plates shells and relevant beams stiffeners DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 124 15 September 2011 4 4 1 Create compartments Compartments are defined by using the pull down menu nsertlCompartmentlCompartment Manager Compartments will now automatically be generated where there is a closed volume Compartments
172. es in the engineering design phase It is often beneficial to re use existing concept models created in previous GeniE sessions There are multiple alternatives for importing such data either from using a journal file or parts of it or by importing concept model as found on the XML file You may also use finite element model data from other systems like previous modelling Sesam tools typically Preframe and Prefem as well as Sacs and StruCad3D The finite element models will be converted to concept models Notice that there are limitations with regard to which data item can be imported There are also features for importing relevant data from CAD systems The solutions supported are via the sdnf format beam models created in PDS and PDMS the SAT format neutral format made by Spatial and guidelines as defined on the DXF format Notice that import of CAD data has limitations on converting types of data items In case you are using Section Scantlings from Nauticus Hull you can automatically create the mid ship section in GeniE longitudinal plates and stiffeners between two frames Some of the above modelling techniques are briefly explained in the following In the picture to the right three guiding lines have been created to be used in bottom up modelling The beam has been created by referring to the relevant guide line The plate has been created by a cover operation using all three guide lines In this case all the lines lie
173. esign load based analysis rule based load application When using Nauticus Hull to define section scantlings based on the CSR rules for bulk ships it is possible to export the longitudinal material data plates and stiffeners for re use in GeniE The pictures below show a typical mid ship cross section as defined in Nauticus Hull Section Scantlings and the similar model in GeniE after importing the relevant data The stiffeners are highlighted and as can be seen they have the right properties as well as eccentricities 24 May 2008 14 20 UM_CSR Section Fbar300x30 Fbar100x10 Fbar150x12 Bulb20x200x10 Bulb20x280x1 1 Bulb20x260x10 Fbar300x20 Bulb20x220x10 Bulb20x280x12 Bulb20x300x 1 1 When the remaining parts of the structure has been modelled in GeniE the compartment definitions can be exported to Nauticus Hull for a subsequent definition of corrosion addition boundary conditions as well as loadcases and content according to the CSR Rules This is an automatic process with no manual definitions involved The rule based information can be imported to GeniE for an automatic update of the model so that it contains corrosion addition boundary conditions and a number of loadcases to automatically satisfy the requirements by the CSR In the following some examples are shown to illustrate how automatic generated properties according to the CSR for bulk ships are applied to a GeniE model Corrosion addition automatically a
174. f there is a horizontal acceleration a force couple will be automatically generated in addition to a shear force Equipments contain information about mass local centre of gravity size and footprint It is also possible to use more high level equipments with no footprint information imported from weight lists from other systems or manually edited Please refer to Volume I of the User Manual for a description on how to use weight lists Equipments may be created for each model You may also build your library of equipments in a journal file or export to a XML file This will allow you to easily generate equipments you need for other projects 4 5 1 Create equipments The command InsertlEquipment Prism shape defines the equipment with its mass size centre of gravity and the Name amen i eEneratar footprint or load transfer area The example below 2 shows the equipment Generator with its size and mass The COG 15 calculated from the default rule which 15 in E m the middle of the box Similarly the default foot print is the same as the bottom area of the box Ww ro Equipments may also be defined and modified from the 10 tonne browser area Specify Footprint EHE UM_Pointmass Name Description EH Analysis ga Drill rig Prism Equipment Capacity Ga Generator Prism Equipment Fl Environment 9 Weight Lists Folder Center OF Gravity COG M at geometric center es
175. ff Mesh Density is not activated since the Round off Mesh Density is activated The automatic Adjust number of elements along edges should normally be enabled default as the face meshes mostly will look better with fewer triangles Disable the option during problem solving if meshing hangs or if a poor mesh 1s observed and check if this has any positive effect Write loads separate should normally be enabled default since memory usage is reduced Disable the option during problem solving if some loads appear to be missing on the FEM model and check if this has any positive effect DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 185 15 September 2011 6 2 1 8 Naming preferences SERRE The default option is to make long names in GeniE and use MW Use long LoadCase names these during post processing inside GeniE look at stresses M Use long Set names displacements forces and code checking or Xtract I Use long Property names The result file the SIN file that is created during an analysis can also be used by other Sesam programs like Framework Platework Stofat and Cutres These programs can read load case and set names up to eight characters long To ensure compatibility with these programs you should use the default option of Short names A long name will now be truncated to eight characters in upper case In case you specify Use long names the above mentioned programs will refer to these us
176. folder apply to the particular activity in question It is possible to deselect a global load case in an analysis activity Insert Tools Help Beam Plate Load case to be used by all analysis activities can be inserted from InsertlLoad Case m There is no limitation to the length of a load case name but if you want to use the Joint finite element model in other Sesam program modules you should limit the name to poti eight characters Compartment Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry FU 7 Name wind Not Equipment Dummy Hydro Pressure Cancel Apply Explicit Load PEE oad Combination Environment You can also define a load case directly from the O Name Description FEM Loadcase FEMLCRue as Analysis g kkr Wind North LoadCase 1 Manual browser Click RMB on the Load Case folder E HUE and select New Loadcase Capacity ew Load Combinati f Environment Equipment Set Active Properties Paste Structure Fields Utilities Save HTML Report x Name wind ast Dummy Hydro Pressure Cancel Apply 3 UM Name Description FEM Loadcase FEM LC Rule If you have specified several analysis Ga Andr S ue activities your browser will look like this 2 f Activities In place step 2 Linear Structural Analysis Static HP place H In
177. gs To make the mesh less coarse decrease the mesh size a global mesh density can be applied A mesh density is defined from Edit Properties Mesh Property or from the browser directly In this case a mesh density of 500mm is specified The mesh density can be assigned to individual objects or set global The global mesh setting is over ridden by local settings Create Edit Mesh property NumberOfElements Md Mesh Density 05 Edit Mesh Properties Md def v Allow edit Applv Mesh Properties to selection New meshDensity Color Code Property Select Objects Mesh Density Number of elements Element Length 500mm m Element Length TEE Growth rate elete E 3 Rename Properties 03 May 2008 18 54 The new mesh with global mesh settings applied is M Mesh Analysis1 shown to the right horizontal plate shown All other mesh settings are in accordance with program defaults Modifying the global mesh density to 250mm gives the mesh depicted below 03 May 2008 19 09 UM Mesh Analysis1 It is advised that you use a global mesh density and set it to default to give the program some guidance when making the mesh DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 176 15 September 2011 The global mesh parameters can be edited from Edit Rules Meshing The rules specified herein are 0 Rules Meshing global the
178. ht Spline Straight Spline x DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 89 15 September 2011 This example includes two stiffeners as shown and some of the edges including internal edges are highlighted to indicate typical edges The number of edges now increases to 30 while number of vertices becomes 19 The example to the right shows the edge that is common the topology line for the two connected plates There are similar topology lines when plates and stiffeners intersect When two beams intersect they cross each other a topology point is established When copying the vertical plate to a new position a new topology line is established and the old one is kept There are two ways of removing un necessary topology lines or points manual or automatic during meshing operations The ToolslStructurelGeometrylSimplify Topology removes topology not used to describe the connectivity between objects You may also specify that the simplify topology shall be an automatic part of meshing operations In this case the topology line used to describe the connectivity between the horizontal plate and the vertical plate prior to copy 15 removed DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 90 15 September 2011 3 3 7 Verify the concept model It is possible to verify the quality of the model prior and after making a finite element mode
179. ialog Feature Edge Guide Point Dialog Linear Slicer mm Guiding Geometry Guide Point Profile Guide Line Guide Spline 1 Poly Curve Explicit Load a Guide Arc Elliptic Load Case 40 Guide Circle Load Combination pq Model Curve Environment Fillet Curves Equipment By clicking the four points sequentially Point1 gt Point4 a guide plane is defined as shown to the right For a guide plane the numbers of spacings in u and v directions are automatically set to 4 equal spacings You may modify this by selecting the guide plane RMB and choose Properties see Sections in the following to modify DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 30 15 September 2011 3 2 11 Find select and display guiding geometry There are two ways of finding and selecting guiding geometries or other objects like beams plates equipments boundary conditions and so on When selecting from the graphic window you click on the object you want to select It is now highlighted and if you have the right browser pane open the same object is highlighted in the browser It is also possible to select from the graphics Guiding geometry is found under the browser tab Utilities and then Guiding Geometry You can now find all of your guiding geometry whether it is a guide plane a guide point a guide curve and so on If you click on the GuidePlanel as shown b
180. ickness will be used In general we assume Chet Loross where tea Where tea is the sum of corrosion additions applied to each side of the plate stiffener For plates we assume that the corrosion addition is specified for each side of the plate tea Lei bee where t and t are the corrosion additions applied to each side of the plate For stiffeners also one sided corrosion additions are applied tea 2 toy where 15 the corrosion addition applied to the stiffener For pipes the outer diameter is retained For all profiles the main dimension i e height width and diameter are not modified only the wall thickness for pipes and web flange thicknesses for other sections is modified For hollow profiles it is assumed that corrosion addition is applied to both inside and outside The rules have different ways of rounding off corrosion additions and Genie supports the needs of CSR Bulk CSR Tank and DNV IAI rules Generic expression leor fac Inax Ces Round leds s F e where fac is a context dependent reduction factor may be different when creating FEM mesh and performing capacity checks tminimum 1 Specified minimum corrosion additions tincrement 1S a Step in thickness used for rounding values off treserve 18 an specified reserve thickness which may be added DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 182 15 September 2011 The table below gives the
181. ied for each plate to simulate a compartment Properties x Object Properties Corrosion Addition Content Fill Height Compartment Loads Load case LC_Tank1 GlobalLoads Local Plate Loads Compartment 24 May 2008 17 33 Comp Barge Analysis 1 LC Tank1 FEM Loadcase 2 em campartment Paint 23 399843754 m 5 858007238 m 3 04 7 382 B2 ml Dummy Hydra Pressure Dummy hydro pressure is used to transfer external sea pressure and internal tank pressure ta V ADAM All dummy hydro pressure loads created in the LoadCase with FEM number 1 will represent external sea pressure Intensities All dummy hydro pressure loads created in other LoadCases will represent tanks That iz one tank per LoadCase Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model OF Cancel Apply bh Dummy Hydra Pressure ads created in the LoadCase with FEM nal pressure Javascript C Simulate physical ids created in other LoadCases will C Ho Global Intensity tank per Loadlase DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 139 15 September 2011 The applied loads from the 24 May 2008 17 39 compartment are now UNI Berge constant pressures for each of the compartment plates FEM Loadcase 2 intensity 1 Pa as required by HydroD The actual pre
182. ield api vs Angular acceleration radians time unit 2 Angular motion period par ameters ee rad s 2 d X Phase angle Phase angle C positive rotation acc 0 deg ded Max negative rotation acc In case you don t want the rotation field to Environment apply to the structural mass and point mass Acceleration field Vector3d 0 m s 2 0 m s 20 m 2 but only the equipment you need to deactivate the option for such In this case the constant acceleration field has been set Structural Analysis Load and Mass management Delete Explicit Laads Generate Applied Loads Represent Equipment as loads to Zero Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass You can also specify the mass of a named set that UM_Comp tel d bi is diff al Eg Analysis a Derck Set On ects HL OR Taste Eg Capacity Monson In such case GeniE will automatically adjust the BI Compartments SUM set Set H 9 Environment material density using a mass density factor for C3 Equipment the objects in question so that objects outside the H E Properties H Structure Rename named set are not modified To do this you select a d Iiis named set from the browser RMB and Scale Mass 3 Evaluators iid Density EL Ba Guiding Geometry set View options Mass scaling will not change the position of the METRE centre of gravity cale Mass Densities In this case
183. ienes TS Plate Normally a flat plate in one plane Shell Normally a plate with single or double curvature Normally a beam not aligned with plate or shell Stiffener Normally a beam connected to a plate or shell Design load based All loads are created inside GeniE and a linear analysis can be done The analysis loads are often defined by rules Direct analysis GeniE will create necessary model data to be used in superelement analysis or together with HydroD in a hydrodynamic analysis Common Structural Rules DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 9 15 September 2011 2 CONCEPT MODELLING STRATEGIES This manual describes how to e make guiding geometry e create plate and shell structures including stiffeners using the guiding geometry e apply loads to the plates or shells e make and control a finite element mesh e add boundary conditions and run analysis This user manual also described how to import from other systems CAD and which are the steps necessary to make a GeniE concept model Before you start to make your concept model you should decide which strategies you should use for modelling load applications and how to make analysis representations these are described in the following A detailed description on how to do the various tasks is described in the next chapter 2 1 Making different analysis representations The same concept model created in GeniE
184. ile Look in cargo_rail_tutoriall 3 ex E3 Save Graphics As Print Graphics Old Save report Save report Femme rmi Files of type Command Files is Cancel Read command file made using other Genie version Compatibility va B xx x 9 Import Export Recent Command Files Recent Workspaces Exit The sequence above creates the following view in GeniE the colour background has been set to white and the view is set to Modelling Structure C Program FilesDNVSGeniE D3509 WorkspacessUM Cargo rail UM Cargo rail gni Genie File Edit View Insert Tools Help Folder Folder Folder H Equipment i Folder Ca Properties j Folder Eg Structure Folder 9 28 Utilities iti Folder Complete 1 1 add Sc62 Complete 1 1 add Sc63 Complete 1 1 add Sc64 Analysisl step 1 subset Complete 1 1 SimplifyTopology LC sea CR setCurrent GeniE V3 4 27 ended 16 May 2007 12 02 38 gt 4 4 Messages Command Line A Visual Clipboard Defaults You may also read in a journal file by using drag and drop Simply select a journal file from your browser and drop it into the command line window DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 8 15 September 2011 1 3 Acronyms frequently used in the Manual Acronym Explanation RMB Right Mouse Button LMB Left Mouse Button GUI Graphical User Interface Degree Of Freedom out comm t
185. in or from the graphic window CES x Curves to sweep from selection Curvel Sweep curves along C Curve Vector 73m 1 0 Apply DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 64 15 September 2011 In this example more than one curve has been selected for sweeping The four curves Curve47 through Curve50 have been selected These are automatically filled into the sweep curve dialog Curve52 is specified as the sweep curve l Sweep Curves ET Curves to sweep from selection Curved Curve48 Curve43 Curve50 Sweep curves along Curve Eurve52 C Vector Cancel Apply When you use the tool button the first input is the curve to be swept while the second input yields the curves to sweep along In the example to the right Curvel is clicked first and denoted 1 in the graphics while Curve3 is clicked thereafter DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 65 15 September 2011 3 3 1 7 Insert using curve net interpolation Curve net interpolation constructs a surface that interpolates two groups of curves The curves in the first group must cross the curves in the second group thereby forming a net The curves need to be connected intersect at the corners but no common end point is required Insert Tools Help Beam b Support d eu Sweep Curves Dialog Joint d E D Fi
186. ine that can be inserted to control the mesh layout It will define a topology edge on a surface between two points or along a curve This means that the feature edge belongs to a plate or shell and it is not possible to insert a feature edge when there are no corresponding surfaces Furthermore when deleting a surface including a feature edge the feature edge will also be deleted A feature edge is inserted from InsertlFeature Edge or from the browser x Eg UM Mesh3 Mesh Number Df Element H E Analysis FEdge n a None Mid line Name FEdae3 FEdge n a lt Md linelz Ei Environment EPOR Point 8 01 7766953 m6 757766 Cancel 9 Equipment Apply Properties End 2 Point 10 m0 m EHE Structure a Features pion Mesh Density Mesh Number Of Elements Py Point Masses Fields Mesh Density Mesh Number OF Elements i L3 Supports save HTML Report Ll FE dge n a z Hone Md lineb Mew Feature Edge FEdge n a Md linelz 8 Utilities FEdges n a None gt None gt dE mise Feature edges may also be Move inserted by referring to existing Create Bear Create Support Curve lines or topology edges Select the line or edge RMB and click Create Feature Edge Create Beam Divide Create Support Curve Cover Curves Create rni Edge Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model
187. ing Always Regen Delete Explicit Loads Generate Applied Loads 1 1 1 Delete loads 1 1 2 Generate loads Represent Equipment as loads 1 1 3 Delete mesh M 1 1 4 Generate mesh Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass MEE 1 2 Linear Structural Analys v Include structure self weight in structural analysis oi Include structure ma v R 1 3 Load Results Duration Os Os Os 05 05 05 Os Os Status Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Mot Started Generate Input Yes DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 This will result in one result loadcase For an eigenvalue analysis the loadcases will not create results The eigenvalues are presented as resultcases After the analysis you will get N number of result cases numbered 1 N where N is the number of eigenmodes computed To avoid overlap between eigenvalue result cases the previous loadcase should either be deleted or be given a finite element loadcase higher than number of eigen modes computed Alternatively make a new analysis activity and not import global loads By using the default input parameters the Lanczos solver is used to compute the ten first eigen modes The shape of the first eigen mode is shown to the right More information can be found in the analysis listing file EIGENVALUE UNIT SEC 554 6062 ET03 1176054E 04 22 54700 04 0493 56
188. ing LMB on the various problem descriptions the relevant structural parts will be highlighted in the graphical window in this case one of the disjoint parts have been selected from the model verification browser When using this technique you can e g decide to view only the parts causing problems or you can save them as a named set for easy access to the problem areas at a later stage Disjoint model parts This option checks if there are model parts that are not connected to others You may create a finite element mesh but the analysis will fail because there is more than one model Beams intersecting plates at a single point A beam penetrates a plate or shell using a topology point to describe the connection This will lead to problems during meshing To come around this problem you need to add edges to the topology either by splitting the plate or to insert so called feature edges see further in the Chapter Make and control the finite element mesh Partially split plates This is reported when you have a plate that partially split another plate i e does not cross two edges However a finite element mesh will be created and analysis can be carried out DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 Short edges and sliver faces In this example a plate with width 0 9 m has been added to an existing plate By using a criteria 1 0m when checking for short edges and sliver faces GeniE will detect and report those les
189. ing a number Same as the number on the FEM file loadcase finite element number and set finite element number 6 2 1 9 Face mesher There are three options for selecting the face mesher The Sesam quad Face mesher h t ti 1 d d 1 t t hil th Ad C Advancing front quad mesher mesher 1s targeting slender and regular structures while the vancing front triangle mesher front mesher focuses more complex shapes It is possible to use both f Sesam quad mesher options for the same model to do this you should use local mesh settings as explained in the next Section The Sesam quad mesher divides surfaces into patches and creates a mesh based on these The Advancing front mesher generates the mesh along the edges first before filling the rest of the surface This means that the Sesam quad mesher normally gives the best mesh in the middle of a surface or patch while the Advancing front mesher generates best quality mesh along the outer boundaries or edges of a surface The Sesam quad mesher should be used for structures without complex details like holes E and complex intersections between surfaces AN Use of selected option an the whole model may make mesh process very slow Recommend to set Ehe Advancing Front Mesh option as a Mesh Option property For detailed analysis of complex structures the on individual plates only where required Advancing front mesher should be used Observe that the latter op
190. inite element size equal to the plate thickness In this case the finite element model has been analysed using a sub modelling approach where prescribed displacements along the sub model s boundaries are computed in a global analysis and automatically applied to the local model A superelement for use in a superelement assembly is made when setting the right properties for boundary conditions highlighted in the picture to the right It is possible to make several super elements from the same concept model by referencing to named sets when making the analysis models DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 11 15 September 2011 2 2 Structure modelling strategies GeniE opens up for a variety of modelling strategies depending on the task you are going to do or how much and which type of information you possess before you start Typically the strategies are Start with guiding geometry such as lines or curves and use these to make beams or plates This modelling approach is often referred to as bottom up modelling If you have a concept model you may divide and split this model to modify or add details to the original model This technique is often called top down modelling In most cases the bottom up and top down modelling is used together allowing you to add details or do modification at any stage in you modelling tasks As such GeniE is well suited for frequent model chang
191. int varying Traction 1 Point O m 0 m 5 m 0 Pa 3 Point Varying Traction 2 Point 7 499999762 m 0 m 5 m 1000 Pa Point 3 Point 5 m 10 m 5 m 2000 Pa 1 Point O m0 5 m 2 m m 3 Point 5 m 10 m5 m Traction 1 2 1000 3 2000 Pa Guide Direction 110 Intensities In this case the traction load is defined from load intensities at three points as well as a direction in this case along 45 degrees in the middle between global x and y directions 4 3 1 3 Component load Select surface load to Component load In this case you define loads of type Constant see example below or Javascript A component load is a pressure load built up from load intensities in global x y and z directions or a local coordinate system Constant component load 01 May 2008 03 10 Object Properties Load Interface Modify Surface Load um PL Pressure Name SLoadt2 FEM Loadcase 4 Define at least 3 corner points 1 Point 0 m 0 m 5 m Point 10 0 5 Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m m 10 m 5 m Footprints Surface Normal Description Surface Surface Load Vectoradio m 1 m SLoadi2 Load Intensities Constant Surface Load 3000 0 2000 Pa Constant Component Load Component2d Fx 3000 Pa Fy 0 Pa Fz 1 2000 Pa e c c The component load in this case has constant pressure intensity in both global x
192. iod 1 rad s 2 rad s 2 2 Phase angle 20 deg ees In the example below a harmonic motion is used Phase Angle The motion angle is atthe maximum when Load Case Properties LC_eqpm_full D the phase angle is 0 General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition i Jm j e acceleration wi M Apply a rotation field in this lnadcase Usually accure at 0 and 180 deg phase angle m Rotation for small rotational amplitudes PUE When gravity acceleration is included the 1099993997 m11 m m maximum total acceleration field will usually angle accur at 90 ar 270 deg phase angle for points Rotation asis vector 4 below the rotation center where gravity and A Vector3d D m 1 m0 ratational acceleration have the same P1 direction C Circular rotational motion f Harmonic wave induced motion Angular velocity radians time unit Angular mation amplitude 0 03877146778 rad s rad s F Ideal 5 Angular acceleration radians time unit 2 Angular mation period 002436088167 rad s 2 rad s 2 L s Phase angle Phase angle C Mas positive rotation acc E ded Mas negative rotation acc Cancel Apply Phase angle 180 Phase angle 90 Phase angle 0 Ampitude DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 147 15 September
193. ion Set Active DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 213 0 Activity Monitor Please observe that it is possible to add d the analysis activity to the journal file in 2 such case the analysis will be executed when you import the journal file Journal activity executions Activity 1 UserManual Analysis V5 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 4 1 1 1 Delete Inads M 1 1 2 Generate loads 4 1 1 3 Delete mesh 1 1 4 Generate mesh 4 EE 1 2 Linear Structural Analys MB 1 3 Load Results L Activity Monitor You can choose to run parts of the activities by de selecting the actual activity In the example to the right only a finite element model a mesh is created Journal activity executions Activity MA 1 UserManual Analysis 65 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 1 1 1 Delete loads 1 1 2 Generate loads 1 1 3 Delete mesh 1 1 4 Generate mesh Kr 1 2 Linear Structural Analys OR 1 3 Laad Results Similarly if you want to use the existing Activity Monitor finite element model it 1s not required to run the mesh activity over again In this case you need to be aware that any changes to the concept model are not part Wi UNE yes of the analysis Activity M 1 UserManual Analysis DO 1 1 Meshing Always Regen 1 1 1 Delete loads LI 1 1 2 Generate loads LI 1 1 3 Delete mesh LI 1 1 4 Generate mesh 4 F
194. ion and name it to Rotate UM Select the circle segment RMB Copy and click the tab General Transformation The effect of the transformation can be seen since the Preview Create is checked Copy Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Transformation Retate 0 Create Rotation Translate Point on rotation axis 0 Hotate Mirror Rotation axis vector Boi GEE F E deg 3 Point Position ge Move Point Combine r C C C C Create i M Preview L ancel Apply The transformation has not yet been created to do this press the Create button The dialogue box now changes as shown below multiply means in this context double the rotation angle Copy Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Transformation Retate 0 Post Multiply Rotation Translate Pont on rotation boo Rotate Mirror Rotation axis vector 0 01 Soa ange 28 3 Point Position ange Move Paint No Combine Preview Multiply M Preview Cancel Apply DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 42 15 September 2011 To make one new circle segment copy the initial segment 120 degrees click Apply To make a new circle segment by using the multiply feature you need to click Multiply prior to Apply nb The general transformation Rotate UM can
195. is if p you want to move your structure a EE specified length along an axis of the local coordinate system of the Length Im x structure specified in the dialog This is useful if you want to move a straight x beam along the beam s own x axis Angle wrt x axis on Use this if you want to move your structure a specified length along an axis which forms an angle with the X axis on one of the planes XY or ZY The angle can be specified by typing in the degrees in the dialog Two points Specify two points that give the direction you want to move If you want you can check the Unit vector checkbox to use a vector of length 1 Normal vector of the Guide plane Returns the unit normal vector of the selected guide plane Flat plate Returns the unit normal vector of the selected flat plate Plane defined by the points Returns the unit normal vector of the plane formed by the three selected points Length Here you type in the distance you want to move the structure DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 36 15 September 2011 Copy move objects using rotation A copy rotation operation requires input on rotation point rotation vector and rotation angle The first task 1s to define a rotation point either from manual input or by picking a snap point from existing objects In this case the rotation point has been selected from the graphical window hiotate Mirror 3 Point Positi
196. isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Ca Properties t ASTM_A516_Grade_65 Beam Types ASTM A573 Grade 65 LJ Compartment Conter ASTM A709 Grade 3672 a Corrosion Addition ts ASTM A1 31 Grade CS E using the command FilelImportlXML Concept Model Hinges af The library contains 71 linear isotropic materials these are documented in Appendix B a Hydro a Load Interfaces a Mass Density Factor Mesh a Mesh Options a Permeability a Pile Characteristics a Plate Types a Reinforcements a Sections a Thicknesses a Wet Surface Structure j Utilities t A amp STM A572 Grade 50 ts amp PI Spec 2MT2 Class C t Spec 2 Grade 42 t ASTM_A992 t API_Spec_2MT1 t API_Spec_2MT2_Class_B t ASTM_A 709_Grade_50T2_50T3 ASTM_A131_Grade_4H32 ASTM_A131_Grade_4H36 t API_Spec_2H_Grade_42 t API_Spec_2H_Grade_50 ts API Spec 2w Grade 50 t API Spec 2w Grade 5 T t amp PI Spec 2Y Grade 42 l5 460 N NL Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E22 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin is
197. ities Function x 2 Heel ngle 10 Draught 3 000000 m Heel ngleRad Heel ngle Math PI 180 Zlocal Math cos Heel ngleRad Math sin Heel ngleRad if Zlocal lt Draught return 1 1025 kg m3 Draught Zlocal velse return 0 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 119 15 September 2011 4 3 3 2 Traction loads Select surface load to type Traction You may choose between Constant 3 Point Varying linear function and Javascript The first option is shown below the three remaining options are similar to this shown in the Section Pressure loads The traction 15 parallel to the wet surface that it is acting on Constant traction load 15 May 2008 11 00 Wet Surface FEM Loadcase 6 Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws 0 uter Y c o o LE Constant Traction Constant intensity 50 Intensities Guide Direction Description Wet surface Footprint Traction Mame SLoad13 Load Intensities Constant Traction 50 Pa The direction of the traction load is determined by the Guide Direction in this case the global Y direction Wet Surface 15 May 2008 11 10 Select a wet surface to apply loads on ws_0 uter v FEM Loa dcase 6 Constant Traction Constant intensity 50 Pa p a T Guide Direction Vector3d 1 m 0 0 m Description Wet surface Footprint Traction Mame SLoad13
198. ive Jacobi VVVVVA CENTAINE DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 192 15 September 2011 6 2 4 Mesh settings eliminate edge The Eliminate Edge option can be used to ignore Rules Meshing changes in e g misaligned edges from typically weld seams and stiffener positions The Eliminate Edge will perform an idealisation of the model so this option should be used with care if the size of the edges to be Relative length ta mesh density 9 0 1 eliminated is high In addition to idealising the structure Qe Tm this option may also effect the computation of finite element loads as compared to the conceptual loads Cancel Apply Relative Length The option Relative length to mesh density should be used with care SPEC TESTIS ine tench as this may lead to elimination of lengthy edges However for density is shorter than the specified value will idealisation of small edges this option will in most cases give a ete eae nae satisfactory result Absolute Length m Edges whose length is shorter than the specified value will be removed In the example below there is a misalignment of 45 mm between the weld seams in the middle of the plate 05 May 2008 04 13 05 May 2008 04 17 UM Mesh9 UM Mesh9 k k No eliminate edge Eliminate edge using absolute value 0 05m The idealisation is done over one finite elem
199. l In the first case focus is on the concept model while the latter case helps you to identify finite elements that might lead to problems during the analysis itself or results with low quality This Section shows how to verify your concept model The model verification is done by using the M Disjoint model parts Model problems pull down menu Too l S truc tu rel Verify Beams intersecting plates at a single point 5 0 Material property can not be found on PIS Partially split plates P5 M Edges shorter than 0 01 m Im The picture to the right shows the system Detect Sliver Faces OUT m Imi 1 olerant Entities default settings If you change these they are IV Geometrical consistency check ACIS Fast Thorough persistent from project to project 1 e the mae Tae Tit settings are kept until you change them Structure connected to geometry Free beam ends Each of these options is described in the mg rump dm following Mismatching eccentricities v Essential structural properties If there are problems in your model the model verification tool will report problems Interactive model checking in the br OWSCI area of the dialogue In this Automatic geometrical consistency check NP model on save restore time consuming for case there are two problems material missing large models and 2 disjoint parts in the model Verify Close Vei When click
200. l Create Edit Section Set Default property with close to zero density the equipment mass 15 represented from a point aes Tum mass and not the structure associated with the equipment In the following example the option Beams and Mass for representing equipments as loadcase independent mass has been used A finite element model has been created The mass of the equipment is represented as one point mass in this case finite element number 13 which is connected to the structure with beam finite elements 14 15 16 and 17 Hinges are inserted where connected to the structure free to rotate around local y and z axis to avoid the undesired bending moments as in the case by representing equipments with one node eccentric mass elements Hinges are inserted at the lower ends of finite element 14 15 16 and 17 select these elements RMB Labels and Hinge Bm4 LC1 Mxy symbols to see the blue labels indicating hinges A better and more realistic moment distribution is now achieved The peak of the bending moment has been reduced from 15624 Nm to 13839 Nm or 13 in this case The differences in result depend highly on structure equipment properties and location of equipments Distance from end m Brni4 L 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 154 15 September 2011 4 6 3 3 Mass model when neglecting eccentricities It is possible to create a mass model negle
201. l example may be a superelement analysis or workflows involving models created in GeniE used by Presel HydroD Sestra and Xtract 7 1 Pre defined analysis activities Analysis activities are defined from the browser as shown You may have many analysis activities and you choose which one is active by setting it to Active Please observe the tick off option for automatically import global loadcases if you want only the load cases Ef UM Analpsis Mame Description fined in th ivity folder this option must be ticked off defined the activ y P Ai Analysis 9 Analysis Analysis See also Chapter 4 for more information Gy Activities fe Analisis Fields Save HTML Report H Environment S FL Equipment Mame Description Analysis Analysis gUseanual Analysis l Create Linear Static Analysis X Users anual v Automatically import global loadcases Available activities Meshing Hl Wave Load FE M Linear Structural Analysis Pile Soil Analysis Load Results Activity Monitor Edit Analysis Mew Loadcase Mew Load Combination C Eigenvalue An analysis is started from ToolslAnalysislActivity Monitor ALT D or from the browser For a linear structural analysis the D eens uu 3 Analysis activities included are meshing linear structural analysis and load UserManual Analysis the results New Loadcase New Load Combinat
202. lates each with different mesh density The meshing algorithm is Advanced Front Mesher the remaining mesh parameters are system defaults Md_050 16 May 2008 11 42 UM_Mesh14 Analysis 1 The mesh using above settings looks like the layout shown to the right The mesh has a steady growth from coarse to fine User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 205 To control the meshing sequence you can use prioritized meshing You may specify several layers of priorities and each priority may contain several objects plates and beams The properties for prioritized meshing are connected to the meshing activity This means that it is possible to generated different mesh for the same concept model The property for prioritized meshing is defined from the browser area Right click the folder Mesh Priorities and select New Mesh Priority Then define number of priority levels you may modify number of levels and their content later In the example below two priorities are defined LE Create Mesh Priority Set Eg UM_Mesh14 HL Analysis H E Environment H E Equipment H Properties Ej Structure H E Utilities fy Evaluators To add a plate or beam to a mesh priority 1 Select the object s 2 Select the priority 3 Click Add Selection The example to the right shows that two levels have been defined and that the plate P19 is part of the first priority
203. lative value You can also use absolute values for the spacing notice that if you later select the guide plane RMB and select Properties the values will be shown as relative x Insert Tools Help Name GuidePlanet Beam Plate plane At 0m m Cancel Support P Step Um 0 A pply P4 m 10 m P3 Point 10 m 10 m 0 m P3 Guide Plane Dialog Poly Curve Dialog Guide Line Dialog Joint m Fillet Curves Dialog Mass eae Guide Point Dialog Compartment Guide Plane Guide Point Guide Line Feature Edge Linear Slicer Guiding Geometry d Guide Spline Profile LJ Poly Curve Guide Arc Elliptic Equipment n Guide Circle 1 2 Explicit Load p4 Model Curve P1 Point 0 m m P2 Point 10 m 0 Load Case Fillet Curves Load Combination mi spa spacings 8 Environment GN eee E Eea QUE dative Absolute As can be seen from the command dialog box above you can create several guide planes at the same time by using numbers of guide planes and length step between the guide planes options are highlighted You may also decide if you want to create in XY YZ XZ plane this will automatically set the relevant co ordinate values DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 21 15 Septem
204. ld Density Young Poisson Thermal Damping and Grade Strength Modulus Ratio Coefficient Factor 0 3 Tensile Strength Pa I C ASTM A36 250 7850 2 1E11 1 2E 5 0 03 400 to 2 in thick ASTM_A131_Grade_ 235 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 400 A to 2 in thick ASTM_A285_Grade_ 205 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 380 C to 34 in thick ASTM A131 235 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 400 Grade_B_D ASTM A516 240 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 450 Grade_65 ASTM_A573 240 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 450 Grade_65 ASTM_A709 250 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 400 Grade_36T2 ASTM A131 235 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 400 Grade_CS_E II C ASTM A572 Grade_42 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 415 to 2 in thick ASTM A572 Grade_50 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 450 to 2 in thick S91 required over l in API Spec 2MT2 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 450 Class_C ASTM_A992 345 7850 2 1E11 0 03 450 API Spec 2MTI 345 7850 2 1E11 0 03 483 API_Spec_2MT2 345 7850 0 03 450 Class_B ASTM_A709 345 7850 0 03 450 Grade 50T2 50T3 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 239 15 September 2011 Grade_AH32 ASTM_A131 350 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 490 m o mm mem m A API Spec 2H 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 430 we mo ee API_Spec_2H 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 483 PPE Ce thick API_Spec_2W 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 427 API_Spec_2W 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 427 API_Spec_2W 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 448 API_Spec_2W 345 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 483 cee e thick API_Spec_2Y 290 7850 2 1E11 0 3 0 03 427
205. ld have the same FE mesh density prior to import Observe that when importing hinges these are subject to name mangling i e equal hinges will be reused Hinges modelled in e g Preframe are finite elements and when translating these to concepts in GeniE hinge properties will be created and connected to relevant beam ends When e g 14 hinge elements are equal on the FEM file they will appear as one single hinge property name mangling The main purpose of the FEM file import 15 to import data from other SESAM programs and systems where data is converted to FEM format prior to import in GeniE and not to act as a neutral storage format The reason for this is that the FEM file format does not include all concept information For the purpose of neutral storage the journal file should be used You may choose to use the journal file generated during modelling activities including the history or a clean variant of the journal file without history see Chapter 3 7 6 To export a FEM file use command Tools Analysis Export FEM This can be done after creating the mesh using the command ToolslAnalysislCreate Mesh DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 9 5 Import SACS file SACS files can be imported to GeniE Properties 1 1 When Properties 1 1 1s checked GeniE imports all sections and materials according to the following priority Any explicit name will be used e Type prefix section material number for example section numbe
206. le on how important the mesh settings can be for the analysis results For another load case the same mesh settings may give other relative differences for the analysis results DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 15 15 September 2011 Mesh settings e First order finite elements advancing front quad mesher 1 m characteristic mesh size Analysis characteristics e 2900 DOF 2 sec elapsed CPU on reference laptop computer Analysis results e Maximum Vonmises stress 1 740 07 Pa e Stress gradients to high to use results in critical region e Fora global analysis perhaps adequate to use Mesh settings e Second order finite elements advancing front quad mesher 1 m characteristic mesh size Analysis characteristics e 8500 DOF 3 sec elapsed CPU on reference laptop computer Analysis results e Maximum Vonmises stress 2 273E07 e Stress gradients to high to use results in critical region e Fora global analysis perhaps adequate to use Mesh settings e First order finite elements advancing front quad mesher 0 1 m characteristic mesh size Analysis characteristics e 252 000 DOF 187 sec elapsed CPU on reference laptop computer Analysis results e Maximum Vonmises stress 4 505E07 Pa e Stress gradients look reasonable e Notice that fatigue analysis requires mesh size typically same as the plate thickness Mesh settings e Second order finite elements advancing front quad mesher 0 1 m charact
207. le the local y axis will sweep in the global X Y plane until the beam is vertical then local y axis is along global X axis If you want to modify this you can do it from selecting the beam RMB Edit Beam and choose Local System Prior to such you should check the orientation from the graphics by selecting the beam RMB Labels and Local Coordinate System The example to the right has three curved stiffeners and one straight beam DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 86 15 September 2011 For the straight beam the local coordinate system is controlled by rotating relative to the local x axis It is also possible to change the direction of the local x axis by flipping the beam and preserving the local y or z axis In this case the beam 1s rotated 180 degrees as can be seen to the right Edit Beams x Local System Offset Vector Hinges Split Points Move End Translate Buckling Factors Local system interpretation Guide local system Qe C Surface normal 92 Guide local system m The local system you specify is projected onto system 92 the curve C Relative to plate Go by I Rotation m is 2 Rotate around local X axis 180 deg on Sa g on curve C Flip local X preserving the Y vector a zs dass VI C Flip local X preserving the Z vector m Applicable for Beams and Support Curves Cancel Apply For a curved stiffener
208. ll inherit set memberships from either P11 or P12 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 TI 15 September 2011 3 3 2 Use 2D structure to make 3D structures The previous Chapter documents how to make plate and shell structures based on single or a limited number of guide curves However it is possible to make more complete 2D parts like for example a web frame and use this to make a 3D structure In most cases this is done using the sweep command The example below shows how a typical 2D web frame bulk ship is created and used to make the parallel part of the vessel typically in long and slender structure like a ship a semi sub a TLP or a barge The starting position for this example is shown to the right It contains guide curves and plates The first task 1s to make cut outs using the feature for profile punch and divide using curves Add guide curves like shown and use these to insert fillet curves See the previous Section Fillet curves on how to do this The radius 550 mm is used for the curves as shown for the rest 500 mm is used L Fillet Curves First Curve Curve23 at Poini 63 19889069 Second Curve Curves at Poini 83 19944 m 15 24 Radius 550mm m ame Divide the plate and use the option divide with a curve You may now remove delete the plate so that you have a cut out C Divide Beams and Segments Divide Support Curves Divide Plates
209. lly Alt S show selected only ALT Plus add selection ALT Minus remove selection and ALT A show all Some examples on how to do this is shown on the next pages DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 31 15 September 2011 In the example below the graphic window contains a display of a guide plane and it 15 shown how to add and remove the guide points Point gt Point5 in the graphic view Notice that these operations are not the same as insert or delete 1 Genie vol3 revised Analysis Lg Capacity Environment f Equipment el Poir Move a Weight Lists EE Properties o Structure Rename Utilities Properties Ga Evaluators Sy Guiding Geometry Labels gt Lj Curves ColorCode b E Points Named set Profil ra 1010 View options Lg Transformations Mesh Priorities Q Model Views E Reports Remove selection he Alt Minus N Sets Show all ALT A Show complement ALT Q Visible model Show selection only Alt S Add selection Alt Plus D To make the points visual select Add Selection in the Visible Model To remove the visual sight of the points select Remove Selection in the Visible Model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 32 15 September 2011 In the example below the graphic window contains a display of a guide plane and it 1s shown ho
210. log TRUE Fillet Curves Dialog Feature Edge Guide Point Dialog Linear Slicer EE Guide Plane Guiding Geometry Guide Point The model curve can be inserted by referencing two existing snap points a point or vertices along a guide line or curve or by assigning the model curve to a topology line Both options are shown below Profile s Guide Line re Guide Spline LJ Poly Curve Guide Arc Elliptic n Guide Circle Equipment Explicit Load Load Case Load Combination Environment Fillet Curves In the example to the right the model curve highlighted in red has been inserted between two vertices on curves Curvel and Curve2 used to define a curved surface surface definitions are documented later in this user manual In this case vertices at curve ends were selected A guide line has also been inserted between the same vertices and as can be seen the model curve follows the surface curvature while the guide line is straight between the vertices The model curve can be used to e g make new plates split the plate or to add a beam boundary conditions and mesh control When assigning a model curve to a topology line it is necessary to select the topology line This can be done by double clicking a plate The picture to the right shows the topology lines connectivity lines between objects for the curv
211. lour below As can be seen only the parts of the beams intersecting with the footprint receive loads The equipment has been removed to easier see the loads There are no load interfaces in this example 26 May 2008 14 18 UM Pointmass LC eqpm skid FEM Loadcase Description Applied Line Line Load Load Intensities Linear Line Load 1 0 0 4528 8 Him 2 0 0 4558 24 Mim DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 146 15 September 2011 The previous examples of applied loads have all assumed a constant acceleration field The loads may be generated based on a circular rotational motion or a harmonic wave induced motion The rotation point is highlighted to the right By using a rotation axis vector in global y direction and angular velocity and accelerations this will set up a line load as shown In this case the constant acceleration is set to zero 26 May 2008 15 01 Load Case Properties LC_egpm full x UM AAA General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition LC eqpm full FEM Loadcase 4 Rotation Axis Point on rotation axis F1 Point 0 9999999 m 11 m0 m Rotation axis vector Vectorsd 0 m 1 m m P1 Circular rotational mation C Harmonic wave induced motion Angular velocity time unit Angular motion amplitude rad s rad s deg deg Angular acceleration radians tine unit 2 Angular mation per
212. lysis 1 Regenerate mesh option 7 LC1 Meshing Rules Force N Length m Always Regenerate Mesh FEM Loadcase 1 Mesh activity M Export beams as members v Smart load combinations Override Global Superelement D ata Top Superelement Superelement Set Mesh Priority v Mesh Subset Global model Local model TN Pile boundary condition Notice that the boundary conditions that are not part of the named set Global_model are not included in the finite element model When making a finite element model based on the named set Local_model the mesh includes only the detailed part It is also possible to change the mesh density between such models this is a technique often used to make refined analysis models l Mesh activity 19 May 2008 15 44 UM Mesh15 Analysis 1 LC1 PETERS Regenerate mesh option i CI Always Regenerate Mesh ce lg ena M Export beams as members vw Smart load combinations Override Global Superelement Data Top Superelement Superelement Set Mesh Priority v Meshes inset Local model model Pile boundary condition acal madel T The picture to the right also shows the parts that are not included in the finite element model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 210 15 September 2011 6 7 Mesh locking Mesh locking ensures that parts of the mesh will remain th
213. m created Join Flat Regions Select Flat Regionis in 2D view Close Insert using Flat Region Manhole example BRLITTTITIITII E Creating a plate in a flat region can be used for several purposes As an example we will here show how you can easily create a plate with manholes We start with a similar model as in the previous paragraph We have inserted a guideplane On the guideplane we have created guidecircles and guidelines to outline our planned manholes By clicking once in the area surrounding the manhole a plate is created The area bounded by the guide circles and guidelines are left empty and we have already created a plate with a manhole After having clicked all five regions we get a continuous transverse bulkhead complete with two manholes DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 57 15 September 2011 3 3 1 4 Insert using loft Lofting is a variant of skinning involving both shells and curves to control the shape of the new surface to be created The operation takes advantage of coinciding shells so they become G1 continuous G1 continuity is where tangent lines are smoothly connected This feature may be used to create surfaces where there is a varying shape e g fore and aft part of a vessel as compared to surfaces with a constant shape typically mid ship parts The feature is accessed from InsertlPlate Skin Loft Curves or from the tool button Ins
214. may now specify the start and stop positions by defining the mm is a ae co ordinate values or from using existing snap points in your Load Case TET Model Curve model In the example below the start and stop positions are HY dunt graphically selected Name Curve Cancel Cancel Define end points End 1 Point 2 222222222 m 5 666566Bt LS NE ciin End 1 Point 2 222222222 m6 BEBEBEBE End 2 x End 2 Point7 777777778 m 5 BEEBEEBE A straight guide line is now created as shown to the right Per default the guide line has 4 internal snap points these may be modified in the command window or by use of the scripting language using the following command Curvel spacings Array 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 This will modify the guide line Curvel to have 10 segments 11 snap points with relative lengths as shown in the command above You may also define a guide line by clicking on 2 snap points You do this from the InsertlGuiding Geometry Guide Line or from the tool button as shown to the right Me The automatic naming schema is used to define the names of each guide line you create ERTE the default name 15 Curve ae a Guide Arc Elliptic The guide line may be modified from selecting the line RMB and Edit GuideLine n Guide Circle Model Curve Fillet Curves DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 2
215. me LJ Model Views Ca Reports Properties Sets Labels ColorCode Copy Create Feature Edge Named set View options Visible model You can select several objects to delete them in one go or you can do it one by one In the example to the left all except one curve has been deleted DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 34 15 September 2011 Copy move objects using translation The steps below show how to copy an object based on a translation vector The move operation works the same way Move Create Beam Create Support Curve Create Feature Edge Edit PolyCurve Join IN Select the guide curve Cover Curves to CODy and then press sed RMB select Copy Rename Properties For move you select Labels M ColorCode OVE Named set View options Visible model Then you type in the translation vector manually or find it from clicking between two points If you use the Preview option you will see the new position before you actually perform the operation Automatic preview is set from the ViewlOptions General ll Con Translate Bora Mirror Scale 3 Point Position General transs fmation at ranslation Vector Vector3di Preview po An example using move operation EN V Create Beam Create Support Curve Create
216. mp_CMB JS is generated independent of option selected Import mesh into analysis e This option stores the imported SACS file as a FE model including its FE Node and Element numbering e See also chapter 9 4 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 230 An overview of the SACS import can be found in the reference documents There are some additions to the reference document valid for GeniE V6 0 1 LDCOMB command In case of GeniE load combinations are no longer written to CMB file Instead they written to sacstmp CMB JS If the As load combinations option is selected this file is automatically read as part of the import process If the As basic load cases option is selected the combinations are additionally converted to and imported from the temporary FEM file Note that recursive load combinations currently not handled 2 LCOMB command This command comply to the format described in the SACS IV manual a more recent format The above description of the LDCOMB command is also valid here 3 Extended built in cross section library The built in library is extended with the following sections WF profiles Euro IPE140 IPEO240 WF profiles AISC W38X282 WF profiles other 100X100 125X125 150X75 148X100 150X150 198X99 200X100 194X150 200X200 200X204 208X202 248X124 250X125 244X175 244X252 248X249 250X250 250X25
217. ms segments into individual beams segments Force Stress Diag ram You M Automatically update beam lines grid when selection changes are now prompted for type Qe Update grid fram selector of attribute and loadcase to Beam Line Load CaselEnvelope Component Hotspot use for more details 1 It the U Z T AbsMax please consult the User Lc mass signtxy gt IT AbsMax l Manual Vol IV LC mass Mxz T AbsMax LC mass Miey 1 AbsMax lic maze tan daa GeniE 24 00 12 Date OF Jun 2008 14 07 40 The example to the right shows a typical envelope for bending moments EL Se wi 14 16 18 20 22 24 Bini MaxEny LC flare sighta MaxHotspot Distance from end m Brni MinEnv LC flare sighty MinHotspot DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 223 15 September 2011 9 IMPORT AND EXPORT Import of data can be done for various data types These may be m ids LE defined by previous GeniE sessions or by other systems There are two SACS file types of import the journal file that can be imported from FilelRead STRUCAD3D file Command File or other formats that can be imported from ACIS SAT file Filellmport Intergraph PDS SDNF file The journal file is automatically created during a modelling session It can also be edited and there is an option to make a condensed journal file without any history also known as a clean journal
218. my Hydro Pressure pos2 0 LC_Outer PIS Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos3 0 LC_Outer PIS Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos4 12 716 LC_Outer PI87 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos5 D 12 716 LC_Outer PI72 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos 13 716 LC_Outer PI72 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos2 E 13 7091 0 905042 LC_Outer PI72 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos3 13 6897 0 811671 LC_Outer PI72 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos4 13 6203 0 633395 LC_Outer PI72 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos5 13 5188 0 469489 LC_Outer 2 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos6 13 393 0 323462 lt 000000000 OO n From Equipments Display Unit Notations From Explicit Loads Explicit Loads Cancel Apply DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 122 15 September 2011 A graphic visualisation after the applied loads have been generated is shown to the right Some of the loads on the deck have been removed for visibility FEM Loadcase 1 When running HydroD the stability and hydrodynamic analyses will include the parts defined by the dummy hydro pressure Other parts will be neglected Manually define a tank compartment for use in HydroD The principle for creating tank definitions for use in Hydr
219. n a plate that needs to be meshed separately DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 190 15 September 2011 6 2 2 Mesh settings max min angles One of the philosophies behind the meshing isto provide a finite element mesh if possible As a consequence the maximum allowable mesh angle is set to 179 degrees The quality of the mesh among others depends Falmeshing if az des on the angles in a quadrilateral finite element The ToolslAnalysislLocate FE will help you to document the angles used when creating the Minimum Angle mesh see previous Sections P VU Failmeshingif p deg deg Split element in two if amp lt 5 deg deg Cancel Apply General Mashin Angle Jacobi Eliminate edge Chord Height M asimum Angle In the example below the meshing all quadrilateral elements with angles larger than 125 degrees are split in triangular elements 05 May 2008 03 23 05 May 2008 03 24 UM Mesh5 UM Mesh5 Quadrilateral mesh with angles gt 125 degrees No quadrilateral mesh with angles gt 125 degrees 6 2 3 Mesh settings Jacobi There are no limitations for GeniE to create a finite element mesh with respect to the relative Jacobi determinant When running the finite element analysis Sestra warnings will be given for all relative Jacobi determinants higher than 4 0 it is possible to de activate this check in the analysis by editing th
220. namic loads and pressure Normally this load type is used when the footprint 1s the wet surface option see next chapter L Create Surface Load M SLoad Define at least 3 comer points Constant C 3 Point Varying Linear Function Javascript 1 aea e LL Component Load Component Load Hydro Pressure f Constant C 3 Point Yaning Linear Function Javascript C Javascript Component Load Constant C 3 Point sarina C Linear Function Javascript Intensities Intensities C Constant C 3 Point waning C Linear Function C Javascript Each of the options is described in the following except for Dummy Hydro Pressure which is documented in the chapter Transfer pressure data to 4 3 1 1 Pressure loads Select surface load to type Pressure You may choose between Constant 3 Point Varying linear function and Javascript The three first options are shown in the following The pressure is normal to the footprint that it is acting on Constant pressure load l Create Surface Load 1 x Name SLoad2 Define at least 3 corner points 1 Point 0 m 0 m 5 m Point 10 0 5 m Point 7 499999762 m 10 5 m Point O m 10 5 m Footprints Surface Normal Vector3a 0 m0 1 r Constant Pressure 1000 Pal Constant intensity This example shows that the load footprint 1s independent of pl
221. ncel Define a name to the transformation here Sc_inwards and add a scaling factor here 0 75 Copy Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation The transformation is defined when clicking on Trensfometior Sc xj the Create tab if you click on Preview Create you will see the effect of the transformation Translate Scaling factor C Rotate Click Apply to make new objects using the C Mirror Scale Sc inwards scaling transformation The scaling C 3 Point Positi C Move Point transformation can also be used at a later stage C Combine Create IV Preview Create Preview Cancel New guide curves are now made with the radius is 0 75 times the length of the original radius In this case the origin is in the middle of the circle and transformations are relative to this point Hence two circles with different constant radius are made The scaling is relative to the origin The radius of the reference curve is 7 5m meaning that the radius of the resulting curve is 7 5m x 0 75 5 625m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 4 15 September 2011 Another scenario of using the general transformation can be when you have a combination of rotation and scaling A circle segment is used to illustrate how this can be done the rotation is around the high lighted point First step is to make a Transformat
222. ne load 15 applied to the edge of a plate A quick look at Mesh AII shows that the load 1s applied as one would expect A line load is applied somewhere in the middle of a plate where there are no edges present A quick look at Mesh AII shows that the load is not applied DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 105 15 September 2011 It is sufficient to add a feature edge along the line load to include the line load in the analysis Hew Tools Help J Beam Plate E Support Joint F oW Mass Compartment d linear lirer After having added a feature edge along the line load and having re run the analysis the line load shows up on the Mesh All view DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 106 15 September 2011 4 2 5 Temperature loads Temperature loads are applied to beams and as for line loads the temperature loads may be defined as own objects or they may belong to a beam The temperature may be constant or linearly varying You may also use the Javascript option to define other temperature loads Observe that the temperature load 1s may vary along a beam axis and not across the section The temperature may also be applied to parts of the beam only A temperature load is defined from InsertlExplicit Load Line Load xi Name LLoadi Insert Tools Help Beam Plate
223. ne load similarly to the beam move operation L Create Line Load To switch to the option where line loads refer to a beam you need to decide the Footprint of the line load In the dialogue floa box for the line load drag the vertical bar to the right until joe you see the input options for the Footprint E Footprint Then change footprint from Line to Beam as shown to the right The input dialogue box now uses a beam name as reference Linear varying load L Create Line Load Name 2 1 0 N m N m fx2 0 N m N m fyt fo N m N m ntum N m fz1 1 000 N m 22 1000 Intensities m Parameter positions Start 0 End fi LocalSystem Vector3d 1 Close Apply Local coordinate system In the example below a typical line load has been inserted on beam Bm19 I 44 Nov 2007 13 39 UM Name LLoadt3 LC line load beam We Bms FEM Loadcase 3 Footprints Parameter positions Start 0 End fi Linear varying load fx1 0 N m 2 0 N m co m e c c fy1 0 N m N m fy 0 N m fz1 1000 N m f22 1000 N m Local coordinate system e When selecting the beam and move it e g 3 5 m in vertical z direction the line load follows Remember to refresh the graphics if you do not i see immediat
224. ness x Thickness z New thickness Allow edit Thickness Thickness Cancel DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 20 15 September 2011 3 2 Create guiding geometry Guiding geometry is used as reference when defining structural concepts or boundary conditions The guiding geometry may be a point a straight line a curved line or a so called guiding plane You can create guiding geometry by defining it manually from the topology of an existing concept model e g along the edge of a plate or from importing data from external sources typically a CAD model or an offset table These methods are described in the following please notice that importing data 15 documented later in this Section For all methods apply that when guiding lines intersect they will automatically create a snap point for reference 3 2 1 Guide plane A guide plane may be defined from the InsertlGuiding GeometrylGuide Plane Dialog A guide plane is often the start of modelling tasks since it 1s used to create other guiding geometry or form the basis for structural parts Typically a guide line or a beam can be defined by referring to two positions on the guide plane Similarly a plate may be defined by referring to four positions In the example below a guide plane has been defined in the XY plane with 9 and 8 spacings in the u and v directions The length of each spacing is in this case defined using a re
225. ng Properties x ll Properties x Object Properties Modify Mesh Priority Set Object Properties Modify Mesh Priority Set Mame Mesh_sequence M ame Hesh_sequence Add Mesh Prior pes Add Mesh Prior Move Up Move Move Down Move Dawn Add n Add Selection IH El Priority 1 Cancel Apply Remove selected Move Up Move Down 19 May 2008 10 04 UM_Mesh14 The new mesh will look like Analysis 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 208 15 September 2011 6 6 Mesh parts of structure only It is possible to mesh parts of the structure and make different analysis models from one and the same concept model This technique can be used to for example define different finite element models and use them to build a superelement assembly or to create local analysis models Meshing parts of structure is often related to running analysis and more details may be found in the following Chapter The procedure to do this is to make a set that also can include boundary conditions and limit the meshing to such All loadcases will be included but only with loads that are relevant for the active selection Typically the self weight load case will contain effect from the selected structure only A tube intersected with a 19 May 2008 15 22 brace is used to show how to create different finite elements for parts of the same Loadcase
226. ng y axis P3 Point 0 m 20 Point D m 10 20 m P2 i 2 P3 P1 P3 Preview Copy move objects using 3 scale The scale function is available from the General Properties tab In general all copy move operations as explained above can be described as General Transformations whereby a specific and named transformation can be repeated as necessary Typically you can specify a copy move translate transformation with a constant copy vector 2m 0m 0m When referring to this transformation all objects will be copied or moved 2m in x direction DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 40 15 September 2011 The scale function is particularly useful when you want to extend the size of a new object relative to the exiting Notice that the scale function 1s relative to the origin 0 0 0 An example of its utility is when a constant distance between two curved lines is desired An example is given below First step is to make the scaling transformation Select the objects to be scaled then RMB and Copy or Move Under General Transformations the option Scale should be chosen x Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Transformation x Create Scale C Translate Scaling factor NENNEN Rotate C 3Point Position C Move Point C Combine Preview Ca
227. nual input A flat plate can be inserted using the pull down FECE Tools menu Znsert PlatelFlat Plane Dialog Beam Flat Plate Dialog Support b u Sweep Curves Dialog x siti Ba Flat Plate P Skin Loft Curves W Flat Region Feature Edge A Interpolate Net of Curves Linear Slicer Sweep Curve Guiding Geometry b x It is possible to create triangular plates triangular plates or Name plates with multiple edges This example shows how to create a plate with 5 edges In the dialog box for flat plates you can insert the necessary number of points by inserting new rows delete them or move them up and down To edit or modify the co ordinates of a row double click the row The co ordinate cem values may be typed in manually or found from the graphics eee window Define at least 3 corner points Thicknes Material 5 4 Cancel The plate PL is now created with 5 edges with the co ordinate values as specified in the input dialog box 2 m 9 m 0 m 8 m 10 m 0 m 0 m 5 m 0 m 0 m 0 0 m 10 0 0 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 50 15 September 2011 3 3 1 2 Insert using skin There are two ways of doing skin between two guide curves at a time or between several curves at the same time The result may be different depending on the curve types Skinning curves be access
228. o pressure for the wet surface WS Tankl HydroD will interpret this as a compartment that can be used in ballasting and subsequent pressure computations The FE loadcase numbers for compartments must start with number 2 i e sequential to the loadcase defining the external sea pressure There must be one loadcase per compartment User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 L Insert Load Case Name LCI Tanki M Dummy Hydro Pressure Wet Surface SET a we lt Create new WetSurface ws Outer wS Tanki h The dummy hydro pressure loads may be verified from e g the load case property dialogue box or graphically as shown to the right in this case the pressure loads for LC Tank3 based on the wet surface WS Tank3 The deck plate is removed for visibility The manual definition of compartments requires that you assign a wet surface to the right side of all plates or shells needed to define a closed volume tank compartment The next Section shows a much quicker approach using automatic generated compartments 4 4 Compartment loads 15 May 2008 12 43 UM Barge Analysis LC Tank3 FEM Loadcase 4 Description Applied Plate Dummy Hydro Pressure Load Intensities Constant Dummy Hydro Pressure 1 Pa Compartments are used to define loads and information for use in e Analyses where the loads are explicitly defined by the user The loads may be user specific or in accordance with rul
229. o the right generate the results as shown below P stress C Numeric annotation Settings 02 Jun 2008 13 55 UM_Results plot Settings Analysis 1 LC mass C Beam diagram Settings Force kN Length m FEM Loadcase 3 Displacements All deformed Min 0 Max 0 0684874 Additional presentation M Deformed shape settings P stess vectors Global min mas Default presentation Use this presentation as default C default presentation C Mo change 6 848736e 002 6 321910 002 5 795084e 002 5 268258e 002 4 741432e 002 Cancel Apply 4214607e 002 3 687781e 002 3 160955e 002 Z 2 634 1296 002 k 2 107303e 002 d 1 58047 7e 002 X 1 053652e 002 5 268258e 003 0 000000e 000 By selecting parts of the structure and modify the attribute to stresses x another result view is generated if needed remember to click the exclamation mark to update the result PAUSE LC_mass Attribute Component Surface 02 Jun 2008 13 58 UM_ Results G stress VonMises Top Analysis 1 LC mass Present as Contour plot Settings Numeric annotation settings Vector plot Settings Beam diagram Settings Additional presentation Force kN Length m FEM Loadcase 3 G stress VonMises Top deformed Min 33 7818 32933 3 Settings F stress vectors Pr 5 293333 004 Global min max 3 040259e 004 a 2 787186e 004
230. oD 15 the same as when defining the external sea pressure Define wet surfaces assign these to relevant plates and define a load case including dummy hydro pressure For a rectangular cubic compartment there needs to be at least 6 surfaces connected to the same wet surface property remember to assign the wet surface to the right side of the plate A compartment is generated by referencing one unique wet surface In this case there are 8 wet surfaces applied to several plates to define 8 compartments 15 May 2008 12 33 UM Barge Analysis 1 Centre of Gravity Copy Move Flip Normal Join Divide Delete Rename Labels ColorCode Mesh Locking Named set View options Visible model Wet Surface E WS Tanks B ws rank Corrosion Addition Plate Type Mesh Property Local System Wet Surface Me WS Tank amp WS_Tank4 ws Tanks no wet surface X WS Tank6 eia 7 Wet Surface BN ws Tank WS Tank2 7 Wet Surface E WS_Tank8 5 Tank3 y Wet Surface v5 Tank4 Wet Surface WS_Tank5 7 Wet Surface WS_Tank6 Wet Surface WS_Tank Wet Surface WS_Tank8 Wet Surface v5 Duter 72 Wet Surface GeniE 123 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 The load case describing the tank can now be created by including the relevant wet surface In this case the load case LCI Tankl will define the dummy hydr
231. oad Summary Conceptual LLS So I gero o onn hound c esis tae ees Staaten Sense rssicon 5 1 1 4 All loadcases Load Summary FEM Load 1 1 5 All loadcases Load Summary FEM Reaction 1 1 6 All loadcases Load Summary FEM Difference DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 156 15 September 2011 Some examples of the content the Load summary Let tf TotalGonceptual 0 01 6564 71909 9008 0 61 tf Total Applied 0 _ BOAT 1909 908 0 67 tf TotalFEMLoad 5681 014 0 853644 719009 93O18 6252 8e013 0 FEM Reaction 216005e012 22 3 4e013 653644 719009 984018 2546590011 0 Total FEM Difference 2109218012 2278 4e013 Of 0 _ 0 24000e011 0 Total Conceptual 0 005889909 7959111600006 O 1 ef Total Applied 0 01 588399 7943911160005 O 1 20 Total FEM Load pO BOG 79430 11600006 0 0 2 Total FEMReaction 8686676011 5911722012 5888891 794330 1 1620964006 103319e009 0 O 2 Total FEM Difference 865e 015917202 0 of O i0G9ex9 0 otal Conceptual 2000 3 Total Applied 2000 EN EN ENS EE D c sal FEM Loa a 10705 MN Total FEM Reaction 8000 1 36424e 011 60000 809999 107e4006 108000 0 E 00 4 Total Conceptual POF 10 Cf Teo 01 10 i 0 5 i Tea PL 9038 T 102318e 012 Of O 1 3460e010 0 L 5 ia Ale a ET C e T EE 0 R
232. oints This option is normally used when modelling straight beams If they lie in the same plane and intersect with plates or shells GeniE will automatically ensure that there is connectivity between the beam stiffener and plate shell Insert Beam x A Neves Bat y Define end points Cancel Apply Ende End2 p2 Overlap Policy Section FdaTb500x160 v Enforce Other Material 5 4 Allow Overlap Stiffener Bml is defined by using Insertl Beam Straight Beam Dialog Stiffener Bm2 is created using the pulldown menu InsertlBeamlStraight Beam and click on the snap points P3 and P4 You can also do the same using the tool button 3 3 5 2 Curved beams in between snap points This option may be used when modelling curved beams or in most cases stiffeners If they lie in the same plane and intersect with plates or shells GeniE will automatically ensure that there is connectivity between the beam stiffener and plate shell e The stiffener Bml is inserted using the pull down command zi InsertlBeam Curved Beam and clicking the points gt P9 Alternatively you can do this from the tool button 3 3 5 3 Straight or curved beams from guide curves The stiffeners to the right are all made by creating a beam from a guide curve Curve8 Curve9 or Curvel0 Select a guide curve RMB and select Create Beam If they lie in the same plane and intersect with plate
233. oints and curves in region Box center Point 24 m z 75 m 4 m extent x 0 4 m m Box extent Y 0 2 m Box extent 2 0 6 m Local coordinate system orientation Locals ustem vector3d 1 m D m Vector CHE The box centre in this case 1s the same as the master node but it can be different and the typical lengths in global x and z directions are 03 m and 0 565 m When defining the box the extent values should be slightly larger than the typical lengths to include all edges The box extent in y direction 1s used to define the volume If you only want the finite element nodes along the plate edges to be slave nodes you need to ensure that the box extent in y direction does not include regions of the plates including additional finite element nodes When using the above option All edges in region all slave nodes will per default be dependent for the translation DOF and free for the rotational DOF DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 168 15 September 2011 5 6 2 User defined behaviour If you want to specify a user defined relation between the master and slave nodes the procedure is slightly different from the rigid body behaviour In stead of selecting a volume leading to a system default definition of the dependencies fixed in translations and free for rotations individual support curves are used and dependencies may be applied to each of them The slave nodes are
234. omp Mamed set E53 m 23 35043553 m 3 4996 ES cm comr View options E553 m 31 3535b534 7 m 3 7495 cm comp yisible model 2 56 m 3 5 m ES cm compre eme 30 86 m 3 5 ES cm compartment Point 23 85 m 23 86 m 3 5 mi ES cm compartment Foint 7 18 m 18 43 m 23 5 mi ES cm compartment Foint 7 18 m 18 43 m 29 5 mi ES cm compartment Foint B B8 m 23 36 m 3 75 mi ES cm compartment Foint B 58 m 31 36 m 3 75 mil B cm EG kell ee m 23 36 m 3 75 mil E m copartmenPrein 20 86 m 4 75 m 23 5 mi ES cm compartment Foint 20 85 m 18 43 m 28 5 ml If you delete the compartment manager and make a new EL ES UM Comp compartment manager all compartment names are reset to Eg Analysis program default m mee e Bl Enviranment Rename H up E quipment Properties EE Properties a Structure i Utilities DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 125 15 September 2011 Compartments can be viewed by using one of the pre defined views typically the Compartments view Mesh All Mesh Transparent Structure Modelling Transparent Results All Results with Mesh You can modify the settings of this view or make your own views as Gonipartments explained in Volume 1 of the User Manual EJ Hide If Compartment Is Filed IPC GS Yel AERE ESSEN Cor 2 Hide Interaction ET Part OF Extent E Transparency Visible Filled G
235. ompartments GJ Hide Interaction ET Part Of Extent E Transparency Visible The picture to the right shows the compartments automatically generated when defining a compartment manager from the pulldown menu nsertlCompartmentlCompartment Manager There are seven compartments that are highlighted You may add label 23 May 2008 11 43 1 UM Comp information and do colour Analysis Whole coding as shown below Rename Properties TESE Content Mass alor cade k Content Valume Coordinates Named set Description Fill Height Fill Height Fraction Name View options Visible model Properties Clear Labels Rename Properties Labels Calorcade Content Mamed set Corrosion Addition View options opc Visible model DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 126 15 September 2011 4 4 1 2 Modify structure When you modify the structure layout e g move a bulkhead the compartments and its content or loads are automatically adjusted The example below shows the effect of moving a bulkhead 5 meters in horizontal direction M Comp 0 m 19 36 m 0 Whole Compartment layout after moving the bulkhead 5 meters May 2008 12 00 As can be seen the lengths of the compartments are adjusted in accordance with the structural change DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 127 15 Septemb
236. on General transformation Point on rotation axis P1 Point 2 222222222 m 8 333333333 0 m Rotation axis vector LEE Rotation angle Description PolyCurv Mame C 5 deg x 1 time s Rotation Axis angle ENA D P1 Preview Cancel Secondly you specify the rotation axis vector either lt lt by manual input or by clicking between two snap points like shown below Translate Rotate Mirror 3 Point Position General transformation Point on rotation axis P1 Point 2 222222222 m 8 333333333 m 0 Rotation axis vector x Rotation angle deg x Copy 1 time s Rotation Axis i angle ENA I P1 Preview Cancel Apply x Translate Rotate Mirror 3Point Position General transformation Point on rotation axis P1 Point 2 222222222 m 8 333333333 m 0 m Rotation axis vector Vector3d 1 111111111 m 3 333315845e 01 Rotation angle fo When using a rotational angle of 90 degrees the new copy Rotation blue 1S perpendicular Copy 1 time s to the old an le P Remember that the s right and rule apply Preview Cancel DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 37 15 September 2011 Copy move objects using mirror A mirror operation requires two input parameters a point in the mirror plane an
237. on the same horizontal plane GeniE supports full 3D modelling of plates and beams stiffeners like you will find on many offshore and maritime structures A top down modelling approach has been used to create the plate with the hole as shown to the right A punching operation has been used to create the hole and its flanges Another typical example of top down modelling 15 to divide the plate to the right and use different plate thicknesses to the various parts The bottom up approach may also be used to create similar structure by building up smaller parts and joining them afterwards DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 12 15 September 2011 When importing data from Nauticus Hull Section Scantlings the longitudinal structural parts between the two selected frames i e start and stop in the mid ship area are automatically defined The concept model contains plate thicknesses stiffener properties alignments and rotations 1 e stiffeners are perpendicular and flushed to the plates The utility tool GeniEDXFImport can translate a DXF file with guiding geometry poly lines and poly curves to a neutral format XML that can be imported to GeniE Observe that DXF poly lines are converted to poly curves or straight lines em TAN WIM Wil The picture to the right shows poly curves imported into M GeniE and a manual skinning of the hull between
238. onent2d 0 100 100 Pa Fx o Pa Pa Fy 100 Pa Pa Fz 1 00 Pa Pa Intensities A constant pressure with components in y and z directions DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 121 15 September 2011 4 3 3 4 Transfer hydro pressure data to HydroD This load type is a special case to determine which parts of the structure that shall receive pressure loads in a hydrodynamic analysis by using HydroD stability Wadam or Wasim analysis This means that these special loads define the outer hull and the internal tanks or compartments In most cases the compartment information is defined as shown in the next Section but it 1s also possible to do it manually as described later 1n this section 15 May 2008 11 40 UM Barge Analysis 1 A barge is used to explain how to create loadcases with dummy hydro pressure The top deck has been removed for visibility The dummy hydro pressure loads are generated by using the option Dummy Hydro Pressure Dummy Hydro Pressure Component Load Dummy S To Dumme Hydro Pressure Dummy hydro pressure is used to transfer external sea pressure and internal tank pressure to WAD AM All dummy hydro pressure loads created in the LoadCase with FEM number 1 will represent external sea pressure Intensities Javascript All dummy hydro pressure loads created in other LoadCases will represent tanks That is one tank
239. ontents Plate Code Check Set Mass and COG Set Bounding Box Point Mass and COG Point Mass Matrix Point lass Local System Overnde Number Format Beam Mass and COG Number format E cientific Plate Mass and COG Pree sia Material T akeoff Beam Material T akeoff Plate Save Report Report format Himi File name LM Mass Report e Save The report contains a table of content as shown below Report Model Id UM Mass Reporti UM Mass Reporti Description UM Mass Report 23 May 2008 file name Last saved C Program 28 May 2008 08 09 58 Files ONVS SeniE_D4012iVorkspaces UM_Mass_Report 1 3 Set Bounding Box 14 Point Mass and COG 1 5 Point Mass Matrix 1 6 Point Mass Local System 1 7 Beam Mass and COG 1 6 Plate Mass and COG 1 9 Material Takeoff Ream 1 10 Material Takeoff Plate Some of the sections are shown DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 158 15 September 2011 The total mass as well as the mass per named sets including the COG can be added to the report sa About Mass tonne XCog Im Cog fm Z Cog Im DOC onne mz IZZ tonne n a P Leg Ded E 094 Boal landings Cellar deck 8113 Orig XT Dompeb Deck 009 2802 lade 224820 Orig 13068 Deck Row EXT The material take off report lists both the relevant data for beams and plates The volume mass and surface area is calculated based on th
240. or Load Summary Apr Notice that you need Microsoft Office version 2003 or later to view the report in Excel or Word DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 236 15 September 2011 11 APPENDIX A REFERENCES Under construction DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 237 15 September 2011 12 APPENDIX B MATERIAL LIBRARY This appendix describes the materials as implemented in the XML file Material library xml The XML file is part of standard GeniE installation Notice that you can make your own material library the same way by a editing an xml file directly or b specify all materials in GeniE and export these as Concept XML file If you store the XML file in the c Program Files DNVS GeniE Libraries you have direct access to it when importing a XML concept file The materials are listed in the API and Eurocode standards However this implementation 15 not a complete library according to the standards The main purpose of this implementation 15 to give the users access to some predefined materials For all materials the density Young modulus Poisson ratio thermal coefficient and damping factor are the same The materials have been implemented using units Pa 1 e m kg N There are 71 materials in the library DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 238 15 September 2011 API Recommended Practice 2A WSD Group Class Specification Yie
241. or several to plates shells beams and stiffeners For beams it is also possible to define a specific number of elements with equal length along a line A line can be a beam stiffener boundary curve or feature edge Number of elements along a line is defined from Edit PropertiesIMesh Property Number of elements or from the browser as shown In this case two properties are defined where number of elements are set to 6 and 12 respectively Ef UM Mesh3 MumberDfElements ee Hdd Mesh Deny 05 x Mesh Density Number of elements Hg Environment EHE Equipment Mew Mesh Propert G J Properties Mete PURE aeg vj md Beart ops Color code all visible prop ities E v Allow edit o 5 Compartment Conter Fields ef 9 Corrosion Addition Save HTML Report Mesh Properties Mew MurmberOfElements Mumber of Elements 6 Mesh Density m Md del Mesh Density 0 5 Md line amp Number of Elements Mdlinel2 Number of Elements 06 May 2008 22 47 06 May 2008 22 46 UM Mesh9 MENSIS d line6 d line12 Y 2 Y b Number of elements assigned to lines The new mesh with 6 and 12 elements along the respective lines Advancing front quad mesher is used with element growth rate equal to 1 10 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 196 15 September 2011 6 3 2 Feature edges A feature edge is a l
242. or3d 1 m 0 rr Close Apply x y The line load can be modified by graphic selection RMB and Properties It can also be copied or moved In this case the intensity is modified as well as the start and stop positions X 44 Nov 2007 13 24 Object Properties Load Interface Modify Line Load UM LC line load free Name FEM Loadcase 2 Footprints LT 7 E La p2 pt Poit m 125 m p2 Poinito m 18m 12 5 m Linear varying load 0 0 1000 N m 1 0 N m fx2 0 N m fyl O N m N m ON m N m fz1 1000 N m Nr fz2 1000 N m N m 0 0 1000 N m Intensities Local coordinate system ZL Load Case Properties LC_line_load_free Documenting the line General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition loads 15 as for p oint Load Description x coord y coord 1 LLoad11 Line Line Load pos1 0 4 loads here 1S shown LLoad11 Line Line Load pos2 0 18 by selecting Properties for the actual load ok Cancel Case DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 101 15 September 2011 4 2 3 2 The line load referencing the beam or stiffener It is also possible to make a line load so that it refers to a beam or stiffener This means when a beam is moved the line load is also moved in the same operation For the previous option it is necessary to also move the li
243. ort defined either as a linear spring with stiffness properties in the translation degrees of freedom or as a full stiffness matrix e prescribed displacements when the deformation of a certain point is known e super nodes used to define the connection nodes used in a super element hierarchy e rigid link support to define a governing point the related points and the relations between also known as master slave Boundary conditions may be relative to the global co ordinate system or aligned with a transformed co ordinate system All alternatives are described in the following except for prescribed displacements which is documented in the previous Chapter The boundary conditions may be inserted at support points or along an edge along a beam along a plate inside a plate To explain the various boundary conditions a common model is used The beams are shown in wireframe mode and the various support points and lines are highlighted Support points or lines are inserted from ZInsertlSupport or from a line or edge double click a plate to see the edges Beam Plate Joint cg Support Rigid Link Dialog Create Beam Create Support Curve Create Feature Edge Create Model Curve Mass Support Point Compartment k Support Curve Feature Edge Linear Slicer DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 160 15 September 2011 5 1 Fixation and
244. osite curve depends on the numbers of snap point on curves to be joined DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 48 15 September 2011 3 3 Create a structure concept model This Section will show you how to make a structure concept model build up of plates and beams A plate can be in a plane or have complex curved geometry it may also contain stiffeners The structure may be built up using a bottom up modelling technique make small parts of the structure and assemble them a top down modelling approach where large parts are made and split 1f needed to refine or a combination of the two approaches The stiffened panel can be made in two different ways It consists of the plate and stiffeners in two directions When using the top down modelling approach where the strategy is to model as large as possible and refine when needed there is one plate and a total of 8 stiffeners Two of the stiffeners are highlighted and as can be seen it is continuous 4 7 over intersections with other stiffeners or plates The bottom up modelling alternative is used to the right and as can be seen there are more plates 8 plates and stiffeners 22 stiffeners needed to build the stiffened panel Some of the plates and stiffeners are highlighted L It is common for all structure modelling to be based on e Manual input i e co ordinates or points e Snap points in existing structure or guiding geometry e Cover
245. otal load sums are maintained but not representative for local detailed analysis The finite element loads are shown to the right 24 May 2008 13 52 UM_Comp Analysis_ Whole Comp_solid FEM Loadcase 7 PRES EP ES oo im 24 May 2008 13 49 UM_Comp Analysis_ Whole Comp_solid Force N Length m FEM Loadcase 7 ali HN Mec e HH JE DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 135 4 4 2 4 Manually defined compartment loads It is also possible to specify pressure loads manually to a compartment Select a compartment RMB and use the option Compartment Loads The load definitions are the same as documented in the previous Section Constant C 3 Point Yarsing Linear Function Javascript Simulate physical C No Global Intensity User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Bl Properties Object Properties Corrosion Addition Content Fill Height Compartment Loads Load case No active loadcase GlobalLoads Local Plate Loads Compartment cm compartment Point 18 m 18 43 m 23 5 mi Constant Pressure Constant intensity 100 Intensities OF Cancel Apply In the example above the constant pressure load of 100 is applied to the inside of all plates belonging to the selected compartment When applying loads to some of the compartment plates the option Local Plate Load
246. otropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E22 1 Material lin isotropic E22 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E22 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 Material lin isotropic E 2 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 19 3 1 2 Section properties User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Section properties can be defined from the command Edit lProperties Section or from RMB in the browser area There are nine types of sections or profiles that can be defined Pipe bar Box I section L section Channel Unsymmetrical I General Section and Cone The Cone property is used in connection with conical transitions during segmented beam modelling The shear factors will reduce the shear contribution The default value is full contribution from shear The fabrication method has impact on the beam utilisation factors as these attributes are used during code checking The default value is Unknown fabrication method You can also import section properties from a section library Click on the tab Section Library and Browse to see which libraries are available There are close to 6000 standard profiles to select from the e AISC library SI and US e NSF Eurocode library e An anglebar library e A bulb library e A flatbar library e A tbar library You may create your own section libraries and get access
247. own load formula This example shows that four compartments have been filled with different content and filling heights The contents used are water blue oil yellow bulk brown and ore grey As can be seen the top shape function of solid content can be modelled For large compartments this can be of significant importance as the pressure is varying The picture to the rights shows the mid ship section of a bulk ship The concept model has been defined to have bottom tanks wing tanks and centre storage compartments This information is automatically used by Nauticus Hull Rule Engine to compute the load cases according to the Common Structural Rules The load case definitions as well as content and filling degree are seamlessly applied to the concept model to generate the loads being used in a design load based analysis approach User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 14 15 September 2011 2 4 Meshing strategies When making analysis representations you need to create a finite element mesh Depending on the type of analysis to be carried out you must decide a meshing strategy to ensure that the finite element model 1s fit for purpose Typically some of the strategies you should evaluate are e Mesh all structural parts in one go or specify a sequence on meshing the structural parts mesh priorities e Mesh 2D structural parts first
248. parametric models BsSemisub Panel Model Input files tutorial includes one joint modelled with curved plates Make a cargo rail analysis by modelling the d aft part of a typical vessel Main focus is on modelling but there is also a loadcase so that analysis can be done Cargo Rail Input files a topside structure The tutorial is based on Panel Code Check Learn how to perform a buckling check according to CSR Bulk new workspace command FilelNew workspace and follow the steps in the tutorial Each tutorial comes with a pre defined journal file command file you find these from the help page as shown above under Input Files If you want to use these files the steps are as follows 1 Create a new workspace FilelNew Workspacel lt name gt Keep the default settings for tolerant modelling and database units 2 Read in the journal file from FilelRead Command Filel lt browse until you find the desired input file 3 Save your model by FilelSave 4 You have now created the same model as in the tutorial you selected DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 7 15 September 2011 In the example below the lt name gt has been set to UM Cargo rail and the imported file 15 for the tutorial Cargo rail js New Workspace Ctrl N a gt Open Workspace Ctrl O Save Workspace Ctrl S Close Workspace Set Default Workspace Folder Open Command F
249. pecified in the mesh rules 4 If there are no settings the settings specified along an edge are inherited The various mesh settings are explained in the following with examples on the effect of the settings 6 1 General It is possible to make a finite element mesh without assigning any mesh properties to the model except for the program defaults see next section In this case the mesh will be generated based on the topology the edges and the vertices of the model Furthermore the individual elements will be as large as possible The model below a plate with a hole shows the edges and the vertices These are used to determine the mesh layout 03 May 2008 16 24 03 May 2008 16 28 UM_Mesh UM_Mesh Analysis Analysis 1 It is advised that you use global mesh density and set it to default to give the program some guidance when making the mesh see the next Section DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 170 15 September 2011 As can be seen the mesh is coarse and the results from a structural analysis will not be usable except for local details It is therefore necessary to assign mesh control parameters globally to the entire model or locally to parts of the model The mesh layout is also controlled the more edges and vertices are built into the model Such lines are defined when beams plates and feature edges are added to the model 6 1 1 Refine mesh by inserting a beam
250. pen the curve punch menu and give a vector Notice that the solid that will be created as a result of the curves and the vector will remove all structure inside the solid Punch with Curves X Closed polygon from curve s in selection Curve2 Curveb Curve Curved Curve Curved Sweep curves along Curve Vector 0 2 OK Cancel This technique is often used when making holes in web frames using profiles with fillet curves The plate that has been punched keeps its name Beams however are normally divided into several beams DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 73 15 September 2011 3 3 1 13 Punch and divide using a profile If you have a profile that varies from a square to a circle you can use the option ToolslStructurelPunch Prior to the punch operation it is necessary to define a punching tool This can be done from inside the punching dialog or from Insert Profile In the example below a profile with rounded corners Manhole is used to punch and divide a plate PL Insert Tools Help lll Guide Profile Properties Beam Rounded Rectangle The profile Manhole is created with l Suppor anhole length 2m width 1m and radius of Joint TUN corners 0 5m Mass 2000mm m Compartment This operation is the same as Fillet Feature Edge fien Curves but it works for a squared cogna m Radius profile only Guiding Geometry
251. per LoadCase No load intensities are defined GeniE will make the necessary data to be used by HydroD Note that the external wet surface is defined in both the panel model and the structural model when applicable while the internal compartments are defined in the structural model only Define the external surfaces exposed to sea pressure M Dummy Hydro Pressure It is required that the FEM load case number is 1 i e the first Xl loadcase When defining such a loadcase it is also required to tick off the option for the dummy hydro pressure In this case there 1s one wet surface WS Outer that includes all the outer part of the hull including the deck The dummy hydro pressure can be verified from e g the load case property dialogue box Wet Surface Lreate new WretSurace gt Vai 5 0 t Load Case Properties LC Outer General Equipment Loads Rotation Field Design Condition n 9 a x Load Gener Structure Description y coord LC Quter PI 5 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos1 12 716 LC_Outer PI75 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos2 D LC Outer PI 5 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos3 D LC Outer PI 5 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos 12 716 LC_Outer PI75 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos5 12 716 LC_Outer PI87 Applied Curved Shell Dummy Hydro Pressure pos 12 716 LC_Outer PI87 Applied Curved Shell Dum
252. perties Wet Surfaces or from the browser as shown below 3 Compartment Conter ae B Cancsion Addition 1 Create Edit Wet Surface Properties 9 Hinges Gg Hydro Wet Surface Load Interfaces Mass Density Factor WS mer D Materials Mew C Edit existing W5 Inner Ga Mesh Mesh Options Hepresents the wet part of the hull Permeability subject ta extenral hydro pressure Pile Characteristics z Plate Types Lg Reinforcements Sections Thicknesses a Wet Surfaces a Structure Me aE Cancel Apply Utilities Color code all visible properties Fields Two wet surfaces are defined WS Inner and WS Outer Save HTML Report When the wet surfaces are applied to a selection of plate s shell s it is necessary to specify which side of the plate to assign the property to This now determines the direction of the surface loads or what is inside or outside in a compartment Name _ Descpion re 5 Inner Wet Surface x Select which side s of the plate you want the property to be assigned to WS Outer Wet ace Edit Wet Surface 1 0v Select Objects Delete Rename Properties amp Wet Surface B WS_Inner B WS Outer The wet surfaces WS Inner and WS Outer will be used as footprints when defining surface loads acting on the shells
253. place step 3 Load Results before defining load cases relevant for the In_place ste Wind East Reference to LoadCase k ln place ste ker Wind North Reference to LoadCase particular analysis activities As can be seen In place ste 5 4 Installation Set Current the two global loadcases are part of this B Installation BERE Installation s R te Load 5 analysis activity by a reference to global salon peer mem Transport load case Transport ste New Load Combination Kr Transport ste R You may exclude global load cases by R Transport st Load Cases selecting it RMB and Exclude from analysis UM Name Description FEM Loadcase FEM LC Rule Load cases for a particular analysis activity T an Anahi pen are created by selecting the analysis ai EE oS Analysis Static e n_place step oad Results activity RMB and New Loadcase In place ste wind East Reference to LoadCase Manual k ln place ste mer Wind North Reference to LoadCase Manual R In place ste me Wind West LoadCase Automatic This example has thus two global loadcases Modan to be used by all analysis activities one RE instalation s Edit Analysis load case for this analysis activity only CEN Load Combination 75 Transport Transport ste Set Active Transport ste R Transport ste CT Load Cases Paste Delete Rename Fiel
254. ple below where radius 15 set to 7 5m DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 28 15 September 2011 To make the lines shown to the right with rounded parts it is necessary to do the fillet curve operation three times You can start at any position to complete the operation In this case Curve9 and CurvelO are made composite curve using a fillet radius of 1m Curvell is generated L Fillet Curves E Poiri 1 839970255 m7 Point 3 811619186 m8 owe _ The next operation is now to select Curvel1 and clicking on it on the left most side and Curves In this case a fillet radius 2m is used and Curvel2 is generated L Fillet Curves Cuve Poirt 0 3192076683 m Point 0 6533855796 m LE The final task is now to add a fillet radius to the triangular part Select Curvel2 somewhere at the left bottom part and then Curvel2 at the upper right part A fillet radius 1 5m gives the final composite curve Curvel3 n Fillet Curves Eae Poin 725287914 n Point 5 448836803 m 6
255. pplied to the model plates and stiffeners DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 137 15 September 2011 One of the loadcases automatically generated is half filling of the centre cargo hold with bulk The compartment content and the generated pressure load are shown below pressure inside the compartment as well as hydrostatic pressure on the outer hull Description Applied Compartment Pressure Load Intensities Linear varying PressureO x D Palm y 29430 Palm h 4 OPa A 3 cargo hold analysis must have proper boundary conditions to simulate the inclusion of the complete structure This is automatically done according to the rules and can be visualised and documented as shown below the boundary conditions are different for both ends Ni Properties Object Properties Support Region Footprint Local System SupportPlane 1 Position Point 83 2 m 0 m 6 791 m C Boundary Stiffness Matrix 24 May 2008 10 12 UM Comp ship Boundary Condition Boundary conditions Let x change y and z Spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness y A Nm Let rx change ry and rz Spring Fixed Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring stiffness im N m i Cancel Apply All export from and to GeniE in this case is b
256. pply ds Create Support Curve c His Curves Create Feature Edge Divide Guide Curves Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Join Divide Guide Curves Cover Curves Delete Rename Divide curves at position aaa ini Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 Labels C Length Range 0 m 7071067812 ColorCode Divide at 0 4 from end 1 Properties Named set View options Visible model Curve32 1s split in two Curve32 and Curve33 in this case The length of the modified Curve32 is 7 07107 m x 0 8 2 5 65685 m Similarly the length of the new Curve33 is 7 07107 m x 0 2 1 41421 m Notice also that the dialogue box shows the total length of the line in the length option The picture to the right shows Curve32 split with the length option using a length of 5m to split the line L Divide Divide Beams and Segments Divide Support Curves Divide Plates Divide Guide Curves Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Guide Curves Divide curves at position C Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 Length Range 0 m 7 071067812 Divide at 5 m fromend1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 cription Guide me Curve2 GeniE User Manual Vol III 46 15 September 2011 In this case the poly curve Curve is divided using parameter 0 5 and split into a modified Curvel and a new Curve2 l Di
257. puting p on 7 the loads h Replace with fill height In the example to the right the reference Gr point is set to Om Om 10m using a fill Filheight fraction th TS height fraction of 1 This fill height is M Fill height h 5 525 m m applied to the water ballast compartment and as can be seen there is now also a pressure load acting upwards on the top plate of the compartment Cargo Volume V 725 3092783 m3 m 3 Cargo Mass M 743442 0103 TUNI amp k The pressure acting on the top plate of the compartment is highlighted above DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 133 15 September 2011 4 4 2 3 Solid content Solid content may be applied to the compartments like for liquid content In addition it is possible to specify the shape function of the top of the content It is possible to define three types of solid contents L Create Edit Content 1 inui Solid C In this case solid type Bulk is selected The Liquid Content Seld Content shape function is using the default values V Allow edi Compartment colour type is brown Sold Type Density 2500 eigen 3 Shape function Width fraction b B 05 Angle af repose 22 5 deg deg L Create Edit Content The dialogue box to the right shows a content defined using Heavy Bulk and a modified shape function Compartment colour type
258. r 23 on the SACS file becomes Sct23 in this case the SACS file has no concept information e Default name schema as found under ToolslCustomizelDefault Names Element Plate 1 1 For plates GeniE will make the largest User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 GeniE 229 Look in sacs inplace Q 2 ir v Date modified 20 06 2011 16 18 27 05 2011 16 52 v Type File folder INP File Name 4 1 Analysisl inplaceinp linplace inp z SACS Files inp File name Files of type Import load combinations As load combinations As basic load cases C Ignore load combinations Length Unit m Force Unit N r Properties 1 1 Element Plate 1 1 Name Prefix Transformation 1 Import mesh into analysis Analysis plate concept possible given that the plate finite elements are in the same plane and have the same properties e g thickness and material If you want a 1 1 relation between SACS element and plate concepts you must tick off this option in the import dialogue box Import load combinations e As load combinations import load combinations from a js file sacstmp_CMB JS generated from the SACS inp file e As basic load cases import load combinations as basic load cases Note that currently recursive load combinations are not handled e Ignore load combinations do not import load combinations Note that the file sacst
259. r Manual Vol III Version 6 0 82 15 September 2011 Repeat the same process for the horizontal brace The final modelling steps are now to delete the high lighted shells part of the inclined brace since the horizontal brace is considered a through brace in this case At last you should use the command Tools Structure Simplify Geometry in order to clean up the model for unnecessary edges see later in this user manual for more details Alternatively the automatic feature for topology clean up as found under EditlRules Meshing may be used The picture to the far right shows the column where the plugs have been deleted The braces have been removed for visibility The upper and horizontal brace is shown to the right 3 3 4 Make special 3D structures like cones spheres and bulbs Cones or parts of cones are often used in transition zones This example shows how to make a cone from skinning operation Please notice that it is also possible to do a cover operation to make a cone but the cone shell is then not lying in the true cone surface When making a cone using skinning it is necessary to refer to a guide curve and a guide point it is not enough to use a snap point The quart part of the cone to the right is made by selecting the curve first and then a double click on the point P1 A typical example can be the transition between one curved shell and two plates DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFT
260. r Scale 3 Point Position General transformation Scaling factor 2 You can select a scaling center by clicking in the gt Scaling center Point m m0 graphics or by typing in the coordinates in the l Choose the bounding box center dialog Preview Paral The preview shows you what the result will look like By checking the Choose the bounding box center checkbutton you can use the center of your selection s bounding box as the scaling center The preview shows you what the result will look like DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 39 15 September 2011 Copy move objects using 3 point position A 3 point position copy move operation requires 6 input values it is necessary to specify 3 reference points and 3 target points This is illustrated by copying the vertical yet skew guide plane from one side to the other The source points in this case are denoted P1 P2 and P3 while the destination points are named D1 D2 and D3 on the picture below This copy move technique is particularly of advantage when modelling battered jackets M copy 0x Translate Rotate Miror 3 Point Position General transformation Source Destination Anchor point Anchor point P1 m 10 Point on x axis Point on x axis P2 Point 0 m 0 m m Point O m 10 m 0 m Point indicating y axis Point indicati
261. r Spring Spring stiffness __ fe KM m y M Let r change ry and rz Fined Free Prescribed Dependent Super Spring Region of dependent points nclude all edges in region Include only support points and curves in region Box center Box extent x m Bos extent r m Box extent m u kN m kN m Spring stiffness D kN m KM m kN m KM m o EHFm kM m Local coordinate system orientation LocalSystem Vectorad t m m0 m Vector Independent point Rigid link will define a region af the structure that will act as a rigid body The feature can be used ta farce all nodes in across section to move as a plane giving it the charateristics of a beam cross section The displacements ofthe nodes within the region is governed by a point defined as the independent point Dependent points If all edges in the region shall be included the translatiaal dofs are dependent and the rotational dofs are free for all edges If only same degrees af freedom to be dependent on the points in the regian must defined by support points ar curves Each degree of freedom ofthe supports must then be properly specified as dependent free fixed etc Orientation The local coordinate system orients the box region in space The local system
262. r jack up all load combinations must be defined in the analysis activity folder GeniE has a default numbering system for load cases on the finite element model Furthermore the load combinations are not part of the structural analysis the load effects are done by scaling the results from load cases It is advised that you use these default rules unless e You want to control the load case numbering on the FEM file in conjunction with load assembly in a superelement analysis e You want to look at the loads and the reaction forces after a structural analysis from the Sestra listing file in stead on a report created by GeniE e You want to run a pile soil analysis this analysis requires that all loads are computed The Section Run Analysis explains how to change the default parameters for load cases DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 97 15 September 2011 4 2 Explicit loads on beams and stiffeners It is possible to apply point loads line loads temperature loads and prescribed displacements to a beam These options are described in the following Each Chapter will describe how to model how to change and how to document a load E g UM Name Description FEM Loadcase FEM LC Rule Before a load can be applied it 1S necessary i Analysis p Common_loadcombination LoadCombination 3 Automatic EHE Activities Wind East LoadCase 2 Manual to set a load case to active S
263. r sources Modify using Properties or Edit Select the guide point Origo RMB and Properties TE Copy Move Name rigo Delete Rename Position Pomt m mOm rd mei Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model Modify the new position to 2m 1m the guide point 15 automatically moved to its new position The same result can also be achieved by using the Move command Properties Object Properties Guide Point Name Position Point 2 1 m 0 m Copy The same principles apply when using the edit function Select Mi the highlighted line RMB and Edit In this example the x eate support we coordinate at end point 2 has been edited Om 2m and the line Sere is automatically modified the blue line iM t Guide Line OOOO ox Divide Name Curvers Cancel Cover Curves Delete Rename Define end points End 1 Point O m0 m0 m End 2 m 2m 2 5 m 0 m Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model User Manual Vol III Geni DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 15 September 2011 44 Join ing Modify us 2 ES 5 5 2 E 5 o EC ES nN g D E O B wu c TD g D ouo amp 5 E D E gt S E I 5 O WV wy o 2
264. rametric curved SCQS thick shell element Triangular sub parametric curved thick SCTS 25 Inserted when adjusting mesh rules to split shell element elements Quadrilateral flat thin shell with FQAS Includes the rotational dof around the axis drilling dof perpendicular to the membrane in the membrane formulation Non structural 2 node beam element BEAS Special variant of BEAS with no contribution of the structural stiffness TESS Element type with no bending stiffness Spring to ground GSPR 1 amp 2 Includes the 6x6 matrix Shim element GLSH 1 amp 2nd Special variant of the 2 node spring element with equal stiffness in two translation directions No stiffness in other directions One node mass element GMAS 1 amp 2nd May be eccentric if connected to a finite element node with 6 dof Within the same model it is not possible to have both 1 and 2 order element types DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 175 15 September 2011 6 2 Global mesh settings Global mesh settings are applied to the complete structure while local mesh settings are applied to parts of the model see next Section The various mesh settings should be used depending on what type of analysis to be performed as well as the degree of quality that is needed There are two types of global mesh settings mesh density and mesh parameters The mesh shown in the previous Section was made without any mesh density settin
265. re dependent in this case the relevant lines by using support curves are included Both options are described in the following DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 5 6 1 Rigid body behaviour GeniE 166 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 Rigid body behaviour or flat planes remain flat planes requires that all finite element nodes slave nodes in the plane are dependent on the translation degrees of freedom of a dependent point master node The procedure is to e Decide the independent point normally the beam end connected to shell structure e Decide the boundary conditions for the independent point normally free in all degrees of freedom e Decide the dependent points normally a volume including all free edges of the shells defining the flat plane A rigid support link is defined from InsertlSupportlSupport Rigid Link Dialog A typical example will be used to explain how to define a rigid link support ensuring rigid body motion behaviour between shells and an incoming beam Insert Tools Help Beam Plate Support Support Point Dialog Joint Support Rigid Link Dialog he Mass Support Point Compartment zzz Support Curve Feature Edge Linear Slicer L Insert Support Rigid Link M ame A Boundary condition of independent point Independent point M Let change v and z Fined Free Prescribed Dependent Supe
266. reate Feature Edge Join Divide Edit GuideLine Edit PolyCurve Cover Curves Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model The examples below show the cover curve operation on two selected curves As can be seen straight lines are used to make a closed loop Notice that the each must be continuous to perform the below operations Move Create Beam Create Support Curve Create Feature Edge Move Join Create Beam Divide Create Support Curve Edit PolyCurve Create Feature Edge Join Delete Divide Edit GuideLine Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model The above examples assume that the curves are created in a flat plane For curves defined in different planes GeniE will ensure that the surface to be filled lies in the continuous plane typically a part of a sphere Some examples are given below how to do this Observe that GeniE can not handle all type of constellations If you experience problems you should divide your structure into smaller parts DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 62 15 September 2011 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 63 15 September 2011 3 3 1 6
267. red to the lower part DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 198 15 September 2011 In addition to the global mesh default settings there are two local mesh controls in the model below Each of the highlighted feature edges is assigned 10 finite elements along their lengths The mesh based on these settings becomes highly irregular mainly due to the inclined connection between plates P11 and P12 but also because there is no global mesh density specified 07 May 2008 01 07 UM_Mesh1Q The mesh option QUAD is defined to force quadratic elements on plate P12 Lreate Edit mesh option X Mesh Options for Edge Mesh Options for Face ouan aeaa Force quadratic elements 4 Prefer rectangular elements 4 Remove internal vertices Remove internal edges Override mesh strategy Advancing front quad mesher Advancing front tangle mesher Sesam quad mesher eed The mesh option QUAD is defined to force quadratic elements on plates P12 and P15 07 May 2008 01 14 UM Mesh10 07 May 2008 01 18 UM Mesh10 07 May 2008 01 20 UM Mesh10 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 199 15 September 2011 The mesh option RECT is defined to force quadratic elements on plates P11 and P12 Create Edit mesh option x Mesh Options for Edge Mesh Options for Face 07 May 2008 01 39 UM_Mesh10
268. relevant if you want to make several analysis models from the same concept model or Superelement type make superelements for use in an assembly By default first order finite elements are used When you tick off for second order elements the finite elements will change to typically 8 nodes per quadrilateral plate and 3 nodes for beams The types of elements supported are shown on the next page DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 177 15 September 2011 6 2 1 2 Model topology The option for always simplify topology before meshing cleans up the model prior so that no un necessary vertices or edges are part of the model when meshing takes place This can have tremendous effect on the mesh that is created and you are advised to always use this option Model topology Performed before meshing Always simplify topology Split periodic geometry if needed The example below shows meshes that is created on the same model with and without simplify topology When making the model two beams are moved without cleaning up the model 03 May 2008 19 45 03 May 2008 19 46 UM Mesh UM Mesh Analysis Analysis1 k Mesh without simplify topology Mesh with automatic simplify topology No internal edges removed Internal edges not needed are removed Tubular surfaces may be made from a sweeping operation where a 360 degree guideline is used as reference highlighted belo
269. rnal Edges edges not required to make the mesh m Eliminate edges not required to represent the model This option can be used when a model contains many internal edges This option can be used to reduce the as a result of importing data from external sources or when a number of patches on a plate that needs to complex model has many edges that are not needed in a finite 2a element model i e the finite element model does not have the same of accuracy as the model itself like for example in a panel model In the example below data from an offset table has been imported The number of points for each imported vertice is high which may lead to edges between the vertices 03 May 2008 22 33 UM Mesh1 No idealisation Idealisation of internal edges Mesh follows all edges part of the model Mesh independent of internal edges Mesh identical to structure Mesh somewhat different than structure May lead to complex mesh details Regular mesh DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 181 15 September 2011 6 2 1 5 Corrosion addition The Genie model is normally created using gross thicknesses but thicknesses may be automatically adjusted to take corrosion into account according to the given context The transition from a gross thickness into a net thickness is not simple it will depend on e set of rules used e the structure part in question e the context in which net th
270. roduction Introduction Release Notes support Request User s Guide Biol 1 Concept engineering Biol 2 Waves pile and soil Bol 3 Plate Shell Structures Bol 4 Beam code checking Biol 5 Plate code checking Reference Documents Command Reference JScript commands Tutorials Wizards Wizard templates HowTo Videos Video Index The most efficient way to work with the tutorials is to make a print out of the tutorials start GeniE create a A small introduction to GeniE For new users you should do this tutorial Make a crane pedestal sitting on tap ofa vessel The structure is modelled with curved plates crane Pedestal Input files Learn the user interface and how to doa small modelling and analysis task Make the pontoons and column transitions 9 using curved plates and stiffeners Focus is also on controlling the finite element mesh Bsemisub Pontoon CJ Input files Make a small module frame and load with A explicit loads and equipments Run analysis perform code checking using Framework as an integrated service The purpose of this workshop is to create two models of a tubular joint one beam model and one 3D shell model and compare the results to compute stress concentration factors This tutorial will take you through the steps of modelling and analysing an arched steel building frame 1 This tutorial gives one example an how the l script language can be used to create
271. s is used Select a compartment RMB and use the option Compartment Loads and click Local Plate Loads To better see the plates you are selecting you should now switch to a view where you see the plates for example the view Modelling Transparent 24 May 2008 15 00 UM Comp Analysis Whole Comp pressure FEM Loadcase 8 Properties Fi Object Properties Corrosion Addition Content Fill Height Compartment Loads Load case No active loadcase C GlobalLoads Local Plate Loads Plate in compartment cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 m 23 5 m DckHor3 1 1 cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 29 5 m DckHorb amp 1 1 cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 m 29 5 m DckVirt2 1 1 cm compartment Point 7 198 m 18 43 m 29 5 mi cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 29 5 m Dck rt4_1 cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 29 5 m DckVrtb 1 1 cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 m 23 5 m Grd2 1 1 segment 1 cm compartment Point 7 18 18 43 m 29 5 m StPl 1 1 1 segment 1 cm compartment Point 7 18 m 18 43 29 5 m 5112 1 1 segment 1 xl Constant Pressure Constant intensity 50 Pa Intensities 24 May 2008 15 01 UM Comp Analysis Whole Comp pressure FEM Loadcase 8 The pressure is acting towards the centre of the compartment since it is negative DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 136 15 September 2011 4 4 3 D
272. s by selecting the plate RMB and select LabelslGeometrylFree Plate Edges The free edges are now shown with a yellow line DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 93 15 September 2011 3 3 8 Stand Alone Beams In order to find stand alone beams in the model select the menu item ToolslStructurelStand Alone Beams aerem Equipment Properties Structure Geometry Punch of Curve Punch Split Verify Stand Alone Beams Dimension Customize Stand Alone Beams Number of selected elements 2 Show Selection C Show Complement Create Named Set con All beams that are not fully attached to a shell are classified as Stand Alone In the illustration above the red beams are stand alone It is possible to show the selection only to hide the selection and show the complement and also to create a named set and add the beams into it This tool can be useful in cases where you observe errors due to instabilities introduced by stand alone beams in the model e g in compartment creation DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 94 15 September 2011 4 MASSES LOADS AND COMPARTMENTS In GeniE you can do design load based analysis prepare models for use in a direct analysis 1 e interaction with hydrodynamic analysis or perform eigenvalue analysis Each of these analysis types use mass and loads differently
273. s red colour and node symbols orange colour 03 May 2008 17 15 M MEM Description UM_Mesh Colorlode k Element numbers Analysis1 Mesh Locking Mesh Lock Coordinates o a Mode numbers Mode symbols Relative Jacobi View options Visible model k Clear Labels DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 172 15 September 2011 6 1 5 Documenting the finite element mesh The quality of the analysis results depends on the quality of the finite element mesh In addition to the users experience there are two ways to assess the quality of the finite element mesh e Check certain parameters like mesh angles the Jacobi determinant edges aspect ratios and warping how to document is shown below e Look at stress resultants to see that there are no abrupt changes in the contour plot this is an indication that the finite element mesh is too coarse The ToolslAnalysislLocate FE will help you to Locate Finite Element s and Node s document the mesh In the example below all finite elements with a mesh angle higher than 145 degrees are highlighted The procedure to highlight these elements is to 1 Specify maximum angle in this case 145 deg 2 Click on Add Elements Show element number 14 Show node number 3 Click on Locate M Highlight element M Highlight node E E 4 The elements should now be highlighted in red colour if you don t s
274. s or shells connectivity will automatically be made CurvelO will give a straight stiffener while the other curves will give curved beams Create Feature Edge Join Divide DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 85 15 September 2011 3 3 5 4 Straight or curved stiffeners from plate or shell edges A safe way to ensure that there is full connectivity between a stiffener and a shell you can create the stiffener based on the shell edge topology The same apply when inserting a beam from a model curve This method can also be used for plates and stiffeners but in this case there will normally be full connectivity since both plate and stiffener lie in the same plan To do this you double click a shell select one of the plate edges RMB and Create Beam It 1s also possible to select multiple edges like in the example to the right in this case at two of the edges To get back to normal modelling view you double click the shell again This example has a model curve Model curvel and the stiffener created from this one 1s also shown Create Create Feature Edge Create Model Curve The picture to the right shows the three stiffeners created from two shell edges and one model curve 3 3 5 5 Orientation of beams and stiffeners The program default when inserting a beam or stiffener 1s a local x axis vector from first to second modelling point of the beam whi
275. s subsidiaries directors officers employees agents and any other acting on behalf of Det Norske Veritas DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 1 15 September 2011 Modelling of plate amp shell structures Table of Contents Ae INIRODUC TION eter 5 1 1 HOW TO READ THIS E DI es E EN 5 1 2 LEARNING FROM TUTORIALS FOR CODE CHECKING Un de eoe eae uo ovde euam sla qe nee uuum ae do sheep e uota eeu aue Un aie 6 1 3 ACRONYMS FREQUENTLY USED AN THE MANDAT 16 a alarm nan bv lu Raw e aw 8 2 CONCEPT MODELLINGSIRATEGIES itte tette e Ente e eoe nee eo Ue ae een ea dati en aa veo 9 21 NEARINGDIEEERENT ANALDYSIS REPRESENTA TIONS mn dd ae die 9 2 2 STRUCTURE MODELLING STRATEGIES re etui ee ET oet osse sali thon ire dr det foo eot t cob rS ie fUr di 11 2 3 OSD AP UP ATION STRATEGIE S E A 12 2 4 MESING STRA PRGIES 14 S PEATE STRUCTURES te ck tes CP NER Ca Y PUE E ERE XE SUY 17 3 1 N PREMISE Shelton tet E Eheu ueber 17 Od Material PFODPFIVVES quiae RR dde eue 17 Sh SE UON PTOP asia t letum drive t 19 Dold e 19 312 CREAT
276. s than the specified criteria In this case the sliver face for plate P16 is selected from the browser and graphically highlighted Short edges can be detected using the same approach GeniE 91 User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 l Model Verification v Disjoint model parts Beams intersecting plates at a single point Partially split plates v Edges shorter than fi m v Detect Sliver Faces fi m Tolerant Entities Geometrical consistency check ACIS Fast Thorough Structure connected to geometry Free beam ends Misplaced reinforcements Mismatching eccentricities Essential structural properties Short edges and sliver faces may have a significant impact on the finite element mesh and should be avoided as far as possible In real cases you should have far less values than 1 0 m as criteria when checking for short edges and sliver faces the value 1 0 m was chosen because of visualisation is this user manual Tolerant entities s C Model problems amp Edges shorter than 1 amp Edge length 0 3 shorter than 1 H C Edge length 0 8 shorter than 1 C Edge length 0 9 shorter than 1 Edge length 0 9 shorter than 1 Edge length 0 9 shorter than 1 Sliver faces 1 amp Sliver face at pos Opis amp Sliver face at pos Sliver face at pos PIE T Z The geometry modelling in GeniE is using a 3 par
277. section C End1 2 different Alignment gt Flush top C No offset centric Flush Bottom Add constant value OK Cancel i DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 88 15 September 2011 3 3 6 Topology edges and vertices Edges and vertices are used by GeniE internally to describe the structural parts like plates shells or beams or when connecting geometrical entities like straight and curved parts In the latter case edges are denoted internal edges Edges and vertices are automatically created during insert including copy operations and they have an impact on the finite element mesh that is created It is therefore important to understand and control the edges and vertices since they have an impact on the quality of the finite element mesh The topology describes the connectivity between structural parts 1 e how many parts and in which directions are they connected to a given edge When you insert copy move or delete parts the topology is always updated but un necessary topology is not automatically removed by program default The topology has also an impact on the finite element mesh and you can remove the un necessary topology either manually or per default when you create a finite element mesh Please consult the Chapter Make and control the finite element mesh to learn how to control the impact of topology vertices and edges to the finite element mesh In the following some ex
278. ses where editing the input file is not required The following is supported e The activities under an analysis i e the local settings on the meshing activity wave load run activity and analysis run activity e Load combinations including wave load cases from an analysis e Loads of all kinds e Equipment e Environment e Compartments e Guiding geometry e Sets e Settings from Edit Rules are exported The following limitations apply e Capacity checks are not exported e Reports are not exported e Dynamic sets are exported as normal sets e Dummy hydro pressure loadcases are not exported Before exporting an xml file you should verify your model by clicking the Verify Model button This will reveal whether the model contains any geometry or topology errors ACIS errors If your model contains ACIS errors it might give you problems if you try importing the xml back into Genie later DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 226 15 September 2011 9 4 From to FEM When importing a FEM file created by e g Preframe Prefem or Patran Pre the finite element model is converted to a concept model For beams there is a 1 1 relation between a beam finite element and a beam concept There is a name recognition whereby a beam finite element number 25 becomes e g Bm25 If you want higher level concepts for example a continuous leg then select the beam concepts RMB and Join Beams For plates GeniE
279. skin loft curve net interpolation or extrude operations using guide curves or beams e Existing structure using copy operations All structural parts may be modified after they have been created like for example in split operations The following Chapters describe basic modelling features on how to create a structure concept model for use in hydrostatic hydrodynamic and structural finite element analyses They also give examples on typical structures that are common to the maritime and the offshore industry 3 3 1 Basic modelling features Basic modelling features include e Insert objects using manual input skin loft curve net interpolation cover or extrude The manual input apply to flat plates and straight beams e Divide and punch objects using existing structure curves or temporarily planes as reference e Join objects that are continuous i e constant tangent in the connection area DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 49 15 September 2011 e Copy move and edit objects for references on how to do these please consult the previous Chapter Create Guiding Geometry Examples on basic modelling are given in the following notice that the focus is on plate modelling Modelling beams and stiffeners is documented at the end of this Chapter The commands for basic modelling features can be executed from the pull down menu the tool buttons or from the context sensitive menu 3 3 1 1 Insert using ma
280. sks to find co ordinate values vectors and so on from the graphical window Typically when inserting a beam you can click on two snap points and a beam 15 inserted in between Similarly you can find a vector by clicking between two points Snap points are automatically made when creating guiding geometry where guide curves intersect and where structural parts intersect typically two beams crossing each other Some examples on snap points belonging to guiding geometry are shown below For guide curves of type straight and elliptic there are 5 points to describe 4 primitive parts with equal lengths Similarly for circular arcs there are 4 points to describe 4 primitive parts with equal lengths For these guide curves you can modify number of snap points and the relative length of each primitive from the command window or on the journal file by using the script command Typically for the line Straight you can modify by Straight spacings Array 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 For composite curves the number of snap points depends on how many points you used to describe the curve The number of snap points for a spline depends on how many are needed to define a spline i e how many primitive parts are necessary In the example to the right 6 points were used to make the poly curve hence 6 snap points Similarly 11 points were used to make the spline but only 5 points are needed to make the spline hence 5 snap points Snap points on a comp
281. ssure will be calculated in a subsequent N wave load analysis performed Description Applied Plate Dummy Hydro Pressure Load Intensities Constant Dummy Hydro Pressure by HydroD 1 Pa In this case eight loadcases are defined each one containing dummy hydro pressure for one compartment The picture shows the eight loadcases in one view load combination and how they appear in HydroD Notice that it is not possible to import a load combination in HydroD For more details please consult the HydroD user manual 24 May 2008 17 46 UM_Comp_Barge Analysis 1 All Tanks DummyLC FEM Loadcase 10 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 140 15 September 2011 4 5 Equipment loads Equipments may be defined and re used in various positions in different load cases When there is an intersection between the equipment footprint and a beam s loads or masses will be created depending on your requirements The equipment can as such be used to make a model intended for linear structural analysis or dynamic analyses like structural or hydrodynamic Updated loads or mass positions are automatically created when the equipment is moved or modified provided there is interface between the footprint and a beam s You can also use load calculation rules or load interfaces to determine which beams that shall be loaded There is always equilibrium between the equipment loads and the applied beam loads Typically i
282. st alternatives the following model is used for references The model consists of four beams one equipment with four footprints and boundary conditions free to rotate in all degrees of freedom For more details see Volume I of the User Manual 4 6 3 1 Mass model for hydrodynamics A common scenario when making a mass model for hydrodynamics is when the GeniE model contributes to the overall mass model of a floater The complete mass model is now together with a panel model analysed in HydroD to find e g rigid body motions and global sectional loads When sectional loads are to be computed by HydroD a description of the mass distribution is required The technique of modelling equipments rather than explicit loads may lead to a faster definition of the mass model In the example below a mass model using the eccentric mass option has been used Finite element of type GMAS one node mass element are inserted The eccentric mass elements have their mass centre always at the same position as the equipment local cog Whenever there is an interface between finite element nodes and footprints eccentric one node mass elements are created sum of masses of mass elements equipment mass Line loads created when equipments are represented as loads See previous sections for details DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 152 15 September 2011 Four eccentric mass elements created when equipment
283. t you will only get the most obvious geometrical errors These errors usually come up because of internal computation errors in Acis but they may also be triggered by inexact modelling by the user very short edges sliver faces etc Structure connected to geometry Check if the concept model is somehow out of sync with the geometrical model A common example of this can be support points modelled in loose air Acis is unable to represent free vertices in a model a vertex must be connected to an edge or a face DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 92 15 September 2011 Free beam ends This option will check if there are beam ends not connected to other structure A typical example may be secondary beams not properly connected to the primary structure Misplaced reinforcements Check if a reinforcement property is assigned to a segment that is not the nearest neighbour to a joint It is required that joint concept has been created typically from InsertlJointlJoint Dialog Mismatching eccentricities This check will detect if you have intersecting beams that don t intersect eccentric typically when one out of two beams have eccentricity In this example BM2 has an eccentricity EE Model problems Sig Mi Mismatching eccentricity vector 0 309821 m while Bm3 has no E Bm2 do not intersect Bm3 eccentric eccentricity This check reports that there 1s the mismatch between Bm3 and Bm2
284. terial types you want to use Observe that these properties can be defined and modified at any time and applied to the model when needed If you modify a property the changes automatically apply to those structural concepts the properties are assigned to In other words you can change properties assigned to a concept at any time You can define your own property values you can use property values part of GeniE libraries or you can create your own libraries These methods are described in the following Sections 3 1 1 Material properties Materials can be defined from the command EditlProperties Materials or from RMB in the browser area see picture below There are two types of materials that can be defined Linear Isotropic Material and Isotropic Shear Material Eig UM Name Description Type YieldStr Pa Density Kg m 3 Young H E Analysis Capacity Environment m Equipment Right click on folder Materials or in right E AM eam Types browser pane to access the menu for defining E Compartment Conter 9 Corrosion Addition materials GB Hinges Hydro Materials Color code all I te Fields Save HTML Report 4 4 Structure mf Utilities User Manual Vol III 15 September 2011 GeniE 18 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 t Create Edit Material Properties The linear isotropic material is the most commonly used material property for use in linear structural an
285. that needs to be defined for use in a hydrostatic or dynamic analyses As such they are not used in a design based load analysis from GeniE but they are reference loadcases used by HydroD Typically the loadcases are used to describe the outer wet surface of a floating structure by defining constant pressure acting on the outside and the wet surfaces of the inside of compartments by defining constant pressure acting on the inside These attributes are automatically defined by GeniE Following are some examples given on each of these DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE Version 6 0 13 There are several ways of defining the explicit loads The picture to the right shows that point loads may be applied at typical structural joints or at any position along a beam or stiffener Similarly line loads may be defined between structural connections or at any position on a beam Equipments may also be used to generate line loads where there is an intersection between a beam and the equipment footprints Pressure loads are applied to plate surfaces and they may be independent of the plates or where they are typically split by stiffeners or plate seams The example to the right shows that a pressure load can be applied anywhere on the plate in this case the constant pressure load or they may have a complex pressure definition here shown as a 3 point varying pressure load You may describe any line load or pressure load by defining your
286. the jfi 77 2 selected guidelines has been performed The same may be achieved by transferring data from offset tables via the journaling system i e offset tables are converted into guidelines subjected to skinning operations 2 3 Load application strategies There are three main options for defining the loads A commonality is that they are independent of the analysis model or the mesh you create since the explicit loads you apply will be converted to applied loads In other words you do not need to consider the mesh configuration when defining the loads e Manual load application the loads you apply using typical point loads line loads pressure loads equipment loads and acceleration loads including gravity The line loads and the pressure loads may be independent or associated with the structures in the latter case the loads are moved when the structure is moved e Compartment loads these are pressure loads that are generated from filling a compartment full or partially with liquid or solid content The compartments are automatically generated provided the concept model has closed volumes e Rule based loads for bulk ships according to CSR Common Structural Rules these are loads that are defined by Nauticus Hull in accordance with the CSR rules for bulk ships and automatically imported to the GeniE model e Creating loadcases for use by a panel model these are load cases
287. the explicit loads already part of the model These are automatically used during the structural analysis hence all effects can be considered during post processing code checking stage or during fatigue analysis Eigenvalue analyses are based on stiffness and the mass It is possible to represent equipments as line loads or mass this means that for an eigenvalue analysis the equipments must be considered as a contribution to the total mass This Section shows how to apply explicit loads to beams stiffeners plates and shells Furthermore you will also learn how to create compartments and fill them with liquid or solid content and how to compute forces based on the content Finally this Chapter discusses how to apply pressures inside the compartments Volume 1 of the User Manual explains how to deal with equipment modelling mass modelling and how to work with different acceleration fields DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 95 15 September 2011 4 1 Load cases and load combinations Load cases and load combinations can be created at any time Before loads can be generated it 1s necessary that a load case 1s selected by setting it to current You can have different analysis activities in GeniE where you have different load cases If you want to have different analysis activities the loads defined in the Load Case folder will apply to all analysis activities while the loads defined in the analysis activity
288. the load generation depends on the mesh density for global analysis it is sufficient to have a coarse mesh while for refined analysis a finer smaller mesh densities are required The other option is to apply surface loads to the entire compartment or to parts of it by selecting plates belonging to the compartment There are a number of surface load types that can be applied for details see previous Section Surface loads on shells Common for both options is that a loadcase must be active to define the loads Some examples are show in the following to explain how to define surface loads based on compartments 4 4 2 1 Content Once you add a content to your compartment the local system will be changed from Global to Replace Z with fill height unless you have explicitly modified the local system of the compartment prior to assigning content This applies both to solid and liquid content 4 4 2 2 Liquid content Liquid contents may be defined from EditlProerties ContentWiquid Content or from the browser UM Comp Name Description Content Type Density Kg m 3 Cc Analysis Ea Content n a ctWaterBallast 1025 En Capacity Ballast water n a clwaterBallast 1025 E Compartments Environment Contents Lj Equipment a P ti E con Froperties Colt code all visible properties Ca Beam Types Fields Save HTML Report L Create Edit Content Liquid Content Solid Content
289. the mass of the entire structure or parts of it from the graphical view or from a report In the graphical view you select the object s RMB and Centre of Gravity The mass centre of gravity and inertia moments are calculated Compute Mass Centre Of Gravity Visual Feedback Represent Equipment as loads C Represent Equipment as loadcase independent mass T M Include structure mass with rotation fiel X Centre of Gravity k Copy Move M De select any selected objects that do not contribute Flip Morrnal ene v Highlight computed centre of gravity Number af significant digits Values for selected objects relative to Centre Of Gravity COG 4 495 6be 006 Kg COG 1 195e 015 m 2 57832e 015 28 5067 m Ine 1 33629 009 Iu 1 42492e6 007 1 3781 2 009 lsz 3 95655e 007 lzz 2 63078e 009 luz 5 70921 e 007 Join Divide Delete Rename Properties Labels Colorcode Mesh Locking Mamed set View options Visible model l Report X To find the mass and Define Report H UM_ Compe M Journal report generation Mods Close centre of gravity from the ame _ EFIE UM Camp Report Title report you select He Masses FilelSave Report and add E Set Contents Set Mass and COG the necessary chapters for Set Bounding Box Available Chapters masses in the report Point Mass and COG Structure TER Point M
290. the target mass is set to 5000000 kg The mass ssal xl density factor is 5000000 4495764 042 1 112158012 You se gt can see this factor from the command line window Cancel Current Mass 4495764 042 Kg This applies only to Target Mass 5000000 MagssFactorl MagssDensityFactor 1 112158012 equipments UM set massDensityFactor MassFactorl When scaling the masses new material properties will be created There are two options e Scale the mass keep the materials unchanged in GeniE but update the materials as found on the FEM file This is the default option Typically the material MATI will be defined on the FEM file as MATI scaling factor and used by the relevant structural members The scaling factor 1s automatically defined by GeniE and is the relation between the structural mass and the target mass DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 150 15 September 2011 e Scale the mass and update the materials both in GeniE and on the FEM file By this you can also verify the new material names and connectivities in GeniE You need to use the command Tools Properties Create Scaled Materials to do this 4 6 2 Point mass Point masses may be added in addition to structural mass The point masses contribute to a loadcase in the same way as structural mass 1 e each loadcase must have the option Include structure self weight in structural analysis For a dyn
291. they may belong to a beam In the first case applied loads are Lose 1 ins only generated when a beam intersects a line load object Both Linear Slicer options are explained in the following Guiding Geometry For both options the line load is defined by using the command InsertlExplicit Load Line Load Line loads may be inserted by specifying components Fx Fy Fz in global x y z Equipment Explicit Load Point Load Load Case directions or relative to a local x y z coordinate system TW IS Surface Load Environment Prescribed Displacement Line Temperature By using features for Javascripting you can create generic line load functions DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 100 15 September 2011 4 2 3 1 The line load as a separate object This example shows a line load of 1000N in z direction applied at start and end positions of a beam Notice that the input dialogue refers to coordinate values that can be typed in manually or found graphic selection cars UM Name LLoadti LC line load free FEM Loadcase 2 p P1 p2 Footprints pl Pointo m0 m 12 5 m p2 Point 0 22 m 12 5 m 0 0 1000 Linear varying load 1 0 N m N m 2 0 N m fy1 0 N m N m fy2 fo N m N m fz1 1000 N m 22 1000 N m Intensities Local coordinate system LocalSystem Vect
292. tion can result in longer time to make the mesh and hence a warning is given when selecting this option 04 May 2008 19 19 04 May 2008 19 28 UM Mesh5 UM Mesh5 Sesam quad mesher Advancing front quad mesher DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 186 15 September 2011 04 May 2008 19 57 hend 19 58 UM_Mesh5 RUE es tee ee SESS NOW Lr p ATA DOO ERIKA Increased mesh density improves Example on Advancing front triangle mesher mesh quality significantly when using Advancing front mesher The effect of improved mesh quality can also be shown using an overlapping tubular joint Sesam quad mesher Advancing front quad mesher uses patches to create mesh makes mesh along edges first Reducing the mesh size in this case 2 size of above leads to a highly regular mesh yielding quality results using the Advancing front quad mesher DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE Version 6 0 6 2 1 10 Edge mesher It is possible to specify the mesh growth rate along edges when the mesh
293. ty software tool called Acis which requires it s input to be highly accurate to the order of 1e 6 This requirement may in some cases be difficult to satisfy for this purpose there exist an Acis feature called Tolerant entities Example If you have for some reason a very short edge or you insert a beam that almost intersects existing structure Acis may replace the short edge with a tolerant vertex This vertex will in effect represent two model positions at once This vertex has a different model tolerance than the rest of the model Points that lie within e g le 3 may be considered to be equal to the position of the tolerant vertex Tolerant edges also be used to replace sliver faces in the model automatically done by Acis In some cases the tolerant entities may introduce model problems so it may be relevant to check for the existence of them Geometrical consistency check This is an internal sanity check of the geometrical Acis model It checks if intersections between plates have been calculated correctly if the parameter ranges of edges corresponds to the underlying parameter range for the curves and so on The geometrical consistency check has several hundred failure criteria to use in order to detect what makes a model invalid Some of these criteria are heavier to compute than others If you select Thorough checking you will test against all failure criteria This can be time consuming for large models If you choose Fas
294. u want to base your data exchange using this option you should check that the js file is running safely at all times To do this you should import the journal file several times to a dummy workspace during the modelling of your real project to ensure that it will give the desired result You can also add comments to the journal file by editing the file or by adding these in the command line interface window It is also possible to include operations that are not logged A typical example can be to specify a view angle and to make a picture of it For more details see Chapter 5 of the User Manual Volume I 9 2 The condensed command file The purpose of the clean journal file is to support import and export of e For frame models with simple plates planar straight edges no holes e Wave load and soil pile analysis runs e Line and point loads simple surface loads e Equipment e Environment e Guiding geometry e Sets e For regression runs where the input file must be editable The following limitations apply e Curved geometry and advanced surface loads are not exported e Capacity checks are not exported e Reports are not exported DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 225 15 September 2011 93 The XML concept model file The purpose of the xml concept model file is to support import and export of beam and or shell plate structures e For migration of model between GeniE versions e For repeated analy
295. u want to include the effect of such walls stiffness material loads they may be classified as non watertight In this case the actual plate is disregarded when defining the outer boundaries of a compartment When calculating loads etc the non watertight plate will receive loads and corrosion addition see following Sections Prior to assigning a plate to non watertight it is Eu cd Permeability Fal ste Mew Permeability necessary to define a non watertight property from E Capacity TERRESTRE mmh r Edit Properties Permeable or from the browser i e Fields A nvironment Remember to not tick off Permeable to ensure non 2 8 Equioment Se watertight conditions 2 3 Properties Beam Types Compartment Conte Corrosion Addition Hinges J Hydro Load Interfaces Create Edit permeability Permeable Non_watertight M Allow edit Mass Density Facto Materials Mesh Mesh Options File Characteristics Plate Types Reinforcements Sections Thicknesses Wet Surface structure Utilities In the example below the highlighted plate 1s assigned the Non_watertight property As can be seen the compartment is now bounded by the outer parts of the closed volumes Bl Properties Mesh Property Local System Wet Surface Mesh Option Permeable 4 lt nat permeable ilb watertight A Watertight Create E dit Permeable EE DET NORSKE VERITAS
296. ust be set to current the active loadcase The reason for this is that the equipment may be used in many loadcases at different positions A loadcase is set to current by selecting it from the browser RMB and Set Current The example below shows how to place the equipment Generator to the deck structure in loadcase LC eqpm and how to move it to another position Select the equipment from the browser RMB and use Place in Loadcase When you move the mouse to the graphical window the mouse symbol includes an equipment icon 3 5 UM_Pointmass 9 88 Analysis Prism Equipment Generator Prism Equipment Environment Sg weight Lists Folder 51 424 Equipment fi Weight Lists Delete f g Properties Rename 22 o Properties H Utilities Labels The equipment is now placed when you click it to a snap point The equipment is connected to the snap point in the centre of the equipments bottom plan the equipments local origin If needed the equipment can be moved to another position Select the equipment RMB and select Move translate or rotate Alternatively you can edit the co ordinate values directly from the property dialogue box 26 May 2008 10 46 UM Pointmass LC_eqem FEM Loadcase Place Place a copy Centre of Gravity Delete Rename Properties Object Properties Section Material Equipment Load Interface Local System Labels ColorCode b
297. utomatically simplify the joined plates By using this option the internal edges from the original plates P11 through P14 are not removed Remember that edges like this can be used to insert a beam boundary conditions model curve or feature edges As explained later in this user manual there will always be a mesh line along an edge L amp Join Join Beams and Segments Join Plates C Join Guide Curves The internal edges are shown to the far right by double clicking Join Plates and Shells Join aligned plates and shells the plate Three of the edges are Join only aligned plates and shells with compatible thickness material highlighted Automatically simplify joined plates Create Beam Create Support Curve Create Feature Edge Create Model Curve DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 76 15 September 2011 Join ie Join Plates Cancel Join only if concepts have same set membership Join Plates and Shells t Join aligned plates and shells Hoin only aligned plates and shells with compatible thickness material Automatically simplify joined plates Join only if concepts have same set membership With the option checked plates are only joined if they are members of exactly the same sets If P11 is member of a set and PI2 1s not they will NOT be joined With the option unchecked set memberships are ignored The joined plates wi
298. vide x C Divide Beams and Segments Apply Divide Support Curves C Divide Plates Divide Guide Curves C Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Guide Curves Divide curves at position Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 Length Range 0 m 16 3430892 Divide at 0 4 from end 1 The poly curve Curvel is divided using a length factor 12m Notice also that the total length of Curvel is shown L Divide x C Divide Beams and Segments Apply Divide Support Curves C Divide Plates Divide Guide Curves Explode all structure in selection into simpler parts Divide Guide Curves Divide curves at position C Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 Length Range 0 16 34592242 Divide at 2 m from end 1 In the previous examples the division factors have been specified manually It is also possible to divide using the positions of snap points vertices or connection points In the example to the left the intersection point between Curvel and Curve is used to divide Curvel Divide curves at position Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 C Length Range 0 m 16 34592242 Divide at p 7705843873 from end 1 Divide curves at position C Parameter Range 0 0 1 0 Range 0 m 16 34592242 Divide at fi 2 59592242 m m from end 1 DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 47 15 September 2011 3 2 14 Snap points Snap points may be used during modelling ta
299. w In some cases GeniE is not able to make a finite element mesh on such surfaces In these rare events you should use the option Split periodic geometry if needed to insert an edge along the surface in the longitudinal direction 03 May 2008 20 07 03 May 2008 20 12 UM_Mesh UM_Mesh Analysis1 Analysis1 360 guidelines used in sweep operations Mesh automatically created DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 178 15 September 2011 6 2 1 3 Element preferences LIIC qUT Ie The option for Prefer rectangular mesh should be used with r7 Prefer ae care as it will enforce rectangular mesh In order to do so it may n be necessary to use small element sizes to achieve such This OMEN _ option should be used on regular and rectangular structures a sal ial aaa pizi only diling elements De Use eccentric hinges When selecting this option you will see Use of selected option may make mesh process very slow Warning as follows AN Recommend to set Ehe Prefer Rectangular Mesh option as a Mesh Option property on individual plates only where required 03 May 2008 20 23 03 May 2008 20 23 UM_Mesh UM_Mesh Analysis1 Analysis1 The meshing philosophy in GeniE is to always make a mesh In order to do so it may be necessary to use triangular elements Disabling the Allow triangular mesh will ensure that as fe
300. w as possible triangular elements are used to create the mesh As such it is not an option for allowing triangular elements or not The parameter Prefer point mass as node mass will ensure that a mass element with zero length will be written to the FEM file If deselected an eccentric mass element will be used If you tick off the Drilling element a special variant of the thin shell element is used It has independent membrane and plate bending parts and utilizes the rotational dof s around the axis perpendicular to the membrane plane in the membrane formulation The membrane part of the drilling element FQAS is composed of four triangular elements The bending part is the same as for a thin shell element FQUS It is thus more stable for deformed shapes than the thin shell element for flat surfaces where membrane behaviour dominates In order to get a more correct moment diagram for the beams the Use eccentric hinges may be checked With the option checked hinges are moved from the node to the eccentric beam ends This feature requires Sestra 8 4 04 or later DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 179 15 September 2011 6 2 1 4 Idealisations The mesh is among others determined of the vertices and their points and Idealisations it may be necessary to idealize the model prior to meshing to achieve a V Remove intemal vertices Qe decent mesh A typical problem may be where stiffeners do not inters
301. w to add the guide curves Curve3 gt Curve6 in the graphic view It is also shown how to visualise one of these E nie vol3 revised Analysis Ta Curve6 Guide Splin Lg Capacity LaCurveS PolyCurve CET H E Environment Le Curved Guide Line MEM 5 8 Equipment La Curve3 Guide Circle t a Weight Lists INS Curve3 Lg Properties H Structure Move rf Utilities Create Beam a Evaluators Create Support Curve Te a s nd Create Feature Edge s LUMES a Points Join j Profiles Divide a Transformations na Ca Mesh Priorities Edit GuideLine um Edit PolyCurve eports 3 Sets Cover Curves Delete Rename Properties Labels ColorCode Named set View options Visible model Show selection only Alt S Add selection Alt Plus Remove selection x It Minus Show all ALT 4 On the picture to the left all above selected curves shown The picture below shows the one curve only together with the guide plane The text box explains how to do it To see only one or multiple guidelines curves or point Just select the lines and curves you want to see RMB and ALT S or Show Selection only DET NORSKE VERITAS SOFTWARE GeniE User Manual Vol III Version 6 0 33 15 September 2011 3 2 12 Delete Move and copy guiding geometry Edit View Insert Tools Help All these operations are done by selecting the object in this section guiding
302. will make the largest plate concept possible given that the plate finite elements are in the same plane and have the same properties e g thickness and material If you want a 1 1 relation between plate finite element and plate concepts you must tick off this option in the import dialogue box Import FEM File When Properties 1 1 is checked GeniE imports all B sections and materials according e to the following priority Any es explicit name will be used for example the FEM file was created Jesus in another GeniE session i e the T FEM file contains concept LJ Documents information e prefix section material 48 number for example section number 23 on FEM file CE becomes Sct23 In this case File name Pe aces the FEM file has no concept Files of type FEM Files fem M Cancel information i Properties 1 1 v Element Plate 1 1 Import mesh into analysis e Default name schema as found under Name Prefix Analysis Tools Customize Default Transformation x Names When Import mesh into analysis E M Element Plate 1 1 IM Import mesh into analysis is checked GeniE imports the ement Plate import mesh into analysis FEM file and create an analysis Prefix Analysis Analysis 9 activity for the imported model Je This analysis will contain a meshing activity containing the imported mesh Genie will also store a two way connection
303. y apply to the entire General FEM options TE model you may override these for Use second order elements m PME local part of the model using the Superelement type fi Automatic load combination FEM numbering Round off Mesh Density a local mesh settings see TUTUGUEP ANNE eS E cm dept ollowing Section eee pos E prs 2 a Split periodic geometry if needed Naming preferences 34 Element preferences Lee adCa 5 The mesh rules consist of five Cr Prefer regular mesh m x n MW Use long Set names different parts General Max Min A Eoi M Use long Property names Jacobi Eliminate edge and Chord V Prefer point mass as node mass rea Hei ght Use diling elements Advancing front quad mesher M Use eccentric hinges bs dor e triangle mesher Each of these options is described ne in the following Edge mesher Uniform distribution Scantling idealizations Linear distribution Thickness nsGross Idealisations lv Remove intemal vertices Remove intemal edges The program default settings are shown to the right Ignore beam eccentricities Ge Use co centric beams Ge Cancel Apply 6 2 1 Mesh settings general 6 2 1 1 General FEM options This option is used to specify which superelement number that shall be General FEM options used when creating the finite element model This may be

Genie User Manual Volume 3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents